Textus Receptus - User contributions [en]

Luke 12:21

2018-12-26T14:39:40Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:21}}
* '''[[Luke 12:21 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:21]]''' [[3779|οὕτως]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[2343|θησαυρίζων]] [[1438|ἑαυτῷ]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[3361|μὴ]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[2316|Θεὸν]] [[4147|πλουτῶν]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:21''' So is he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:21 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:21]]''' “So is he who lays up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God.”

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:21 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:21 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] So is he that tresourith to hym silf, and is not riche in God. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] So is it with him that gadereth ryches and is not ryche in God. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Thus goeth it with him yt gathereth treasure for himself, and is not riche in God. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] So is it with him that gathereth riches to him selfe, and is not riche towarde God. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] So is it with hym that gathereth ryches, and is not ryche in God. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] So is he that gathereth riches to him selfe, and is not ryche towardes God. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] So is he that gathereth riches to himselfe, and is not riche in God. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] So is he that laieth vp treasure for himselfe, and is not rich towards God. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] such is he, who heaps up his treasure here, and makes no provision for another world. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] So is he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] So is he that heapeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich towards God. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] So is he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Just such is every one who heapeth up treasure for self, and is not rich towards God. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] So is he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich towards God. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] So it fares with him who amasses treasure for himself, but is not rich toward God. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] So is he who layeth up to himself treasures, and towards Aloha is not rich. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] So is every one that lays up treasures for himself and is not rich in God. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Thus he laying up treasure for himself, and not for God being rich. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] So is he that lays up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] So is he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich towards God. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] So is he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich towards God. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] So is he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] Thus is he who lays up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] so `is' he who is treasuring up to himself, and is not rich toward God.' ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] So is he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] [So, is he that is laying up treasure for himself, and is not rich, towards God.] (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] So is every one laying up treasure for himself, and not rich toward God. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] So is he who is laying up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God." (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] So it is with those who lay by wealth for themselves and are not rich to the glory of God." (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "So is it with him who amasses treasure for himself, but has no riches in God." (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] So is he that lays up treasure for himself and is not rich toward God. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> هكذا الذي يكنز لنفسه وليس هو غنيا للّه </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Hala da onhassun handiac beretaco biltzen dituena, eta Iaincoa baithan abrats eztena.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:21) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:21 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Il en est ainsi de celui qui amasse des tresors pour lui-meme, et qui n'est pas riche quant à Dieu. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Il en est ainsi de celui qui fait de grands amas de biens pour soi-même, et qui n'est pas riche en Dieu. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Also geht es, wer sich Schätze sammelt und ist nicht reich in Gott. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Così avviene a chi fa tesoro a sè stesso, e non è ricco in Dio. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Così è di chi tesoreggia per sé, e non è ricco in vista di Dio. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* sic est qui sibi thesaurizat et non est in Deum dives [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Так бывает с тем , кто собирает сокровища для себя, а не в Бога богатеет. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:21 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Yesu akamaliza kwa kusema "Ndivyo ilivyo kwa mtu anayejilundikia mali kwa ajili yake mwenyewe, lakini si tajiri mbele ya Mungu."

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Så går det den som samlar skatter åt sig själv, men icke är rik inför Gud.» (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Gayon nga ang nagpapakayaman sa ganang kaniyang sarili, at hindi mayaman sa Dios. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Hễ ai thâu trử của cho mình mà không giàu có nơi Ðức Chúa Trời thì cũng như vậy. (Lu-ca 12:21 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:21 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:21

2018-12-26T14:39:24Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

Luke 12:20

2018-12-26T14:39:01Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:20}}
* '''[[Luke 12:20 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:20]]''' [[2036|εἶπε]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[846|αὐτῷ]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[2316|Θεός]], [[878|Ἄφρον]], [[5026|ταύτῃ]] [[3588|τῇ]] [[3571|νυκτὶ]] [[3588|τὴν]] [[5590|ψυχήν]] [[4675|σου]] [[523|ἀπαιτοῦσιν]] [[575|ἀπὸ]] [[4675|σοῦ]]· [[3739|ἃ]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[2090|ἡτοίμασας]], [[5101|τίνι]] [[2071|ἔσται]];
{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:20''' But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be, which thou hast provided?

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:20 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:20]]''' But God said to him, ‘You fool! This night your soul will be required of you; then whose will those things be which you have provided?’

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:20 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:20 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And God seide to hym, Fool, in this nyyt thei schulen take thi lijf fro thee. And whos schulen tho thingis be, that thou hast arayed? ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] But God sayde vnto him: Thou fole this night will they fetche awaye thy soule agayne from the. Then whose shall thoose thinges be which thou hast provyded? ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But God sayde vnto him: Thou foole, this night shal they requyre thy soule from the, and whose shal it be that thou hast prepared? (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] But God sayd vnto him. Thou fole, this nyght will they fetche awaye thy soule agayne from the. Then whose shall those thynges be, which thou hast prouided? ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] But God sayed vnto hym: Thou fole, thys nyghte wyll they fetche awaye thy soule agayne from the. Then whose shall these thinges be which thou haste prouyded? ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] But God sayde vnto hym: Thou foole, this nyght wyll they fetch awaye thy soule againe fro thee: Then whose shall those thynges be, which thou hast prouided? ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] But God said vnto him, O foole, this night wil they fetch away thy soule fro thee: then whose shall those things be which thou hast prouided? ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] But God said vnto him, Thou foole, this night thy soule shal be required of thee: then whose shal those things be which thou hast prouided? ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] but God said to him, thou fool, this night shall thy soul be required of thee: who then shall enjoy what thou hast provided? ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be which thou hast provided; (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be, which thou hast provided? ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night shall thy soul be required of thee; then whose shall those things be which thou hast provided? (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But God said to him, Thou fool, this night they require thy soul of thee: and whose shall the things be that thou hast provided? (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But God said to him, Thou fool! this night shall they demand thy life from thee; and the things which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] But God said to him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be which thou hast provided? (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] But God said to him, Fool! this very night your soul is required of you. Whose, then, shall those things be, which you have provided? (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But Aloha said to him, Reasonless (man)! this night thy soul they shall require of thee; and then, (the things) which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] But God said to him, Foolish man, this night they shall require your soul from you; and who then will have the goods which you have provided? (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Said but to him the God: O unwise, this the night the life of thee they require from thee; what and thou hast prepared, for whom shall be? ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] But God said to him: Fool! this night thy soul shall be required of thee; and whose shall those things be, which thou didst provide? (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] But God said to him, Fool! this night will thy soul he required of thee; and whose will those things be which thou hast laid up? (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be, which thou hast provided? ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] But God said unto him, Thou foolish one, this night is thy soul required of thee; and the things which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But God said to him, Fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee; and whose shall be what thou hast prepared? (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `And God said to him, Unthinking one! this night thy soul they shall require from thee, and what things thou didst prepare -- to whom shall they be? ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] But God said unto him, Thou foolish one, this night is thy soul required of thee; and the things which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But God said unto him––Simple one! on this very night, they are asking, thy soul, from thee; The things, then, which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But God said to him, Thou fool, this night they are demanding thy soul from thee; and to whom shall those things which thou hast prepared, belong? (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But God said to him, 'Senseless one! this night they require your soul of you; and the things you prepared, whose shall they be?' (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But God said to the man 'Fool! This very night your life is being demanded; and as for all that you have prepared—who will have it?' (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "But God said to him, "'Foolish man, this night your life is demanded from you; and these preparations—for whom shall they be?' (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But God said to him: Senseless man, this night shall they require thy soul of thee: but the things that thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> فقال له الله يا غبي هذه الليلة تطلب نفسك منك. فهذه التي اعددتها لمن تكون. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Baina erran cieçón Iaincoac, Erhoá, gaurco gauèan eure arimá edequiren çaic: eta dituán gauçác, noren içanen dirade?

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:20) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:20 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Mais Dieu lui dit: Insense! cette nuit meme ton ame te sera redemandee; et ces choses que tu as preparees, à qui seront-elles? (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Mais Dieu lui dit : insensé, en cette même nuit ton âme te sera redemandée; et les choses que tu as préparées, à qui seront-elles? (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Aber Gott sprach zu ihm: Du Narr! diese Nacht wird man deine Seele von dir fordern; und wes wird's sein, das du bereitet hast? (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ma Iddio gli disse: Stolto, questa stessa notte, l’anima tua ti sarà ridomandata; e di cui saranno le cose che tu hai apparecchiate? (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Ma Dio gli disse: Stolto, questa notte stessa l’anima tua ti sarà ridomandata; e quel che hai preparato, di chi sarà? (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* dixit autem illi Deus stulte hac nocte animam tuam repetunt a te quae autem parasti cuius erunt [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Но Бог сказал ему: безумный! в сию ночь душу твою возьмут у тебя; кому же достанется то, что ты заготовил? [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:20 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Lakini Mungu akamwambia: Mpumbavu wewe; leo usiku roho yako itachukuliwa. Na vitu vile vyote ulivyojilundikia vitakuwa vya nani?"

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men Gud sade till honom: 'Du dåre, i denna natt skall din själ utkrävas av dig; vem skall då få vad du har samlat i förråd?' -- (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Datapuwa't sinabi sa kaniya ng Dios, Ikaw na haling, hihingin sa iyo sa gabing ito ang iyong kaluluwa; at ang mga bagay na inihanda mo, ay mapapa sa kanino kaya? (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Song Ðức Chúa Trời phán cùng người rằng: Hỡi kẻ dại! Chính đêm nay linh hồn ngươi sẽ bị đòi lại; vậy những của cải ngươi đã sắm sẵn sẽ thuộc về ai? (Lu-ca 12:20 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:20 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:20

2018-12-26T14:38:42Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:20}}
* '''[[Luke 12:20 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:20]]''' [[2036|εἶπε]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[846|αὐτῷ]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[2316|Θεός]], [[878|Ἄφρον]], [[5026|ταύτῃ]] [[3588|τῇ]] [[3571|νυκτὶ]] [[3588|τὴν]] [[5590|ψυχήν]] [[4675|σου]] [[523|ἀπαιτοῦσιν]] [[575|ἀπὸ]] [[4675|σοῦ]]· [[3739|ἃ]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[2090|ἡτοίμασας]], [[5101|τίνι]] [[2071|ἔσται]];
{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:20''' But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be, which thou hast provided?

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:20 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:20]]''' But God said to him, ‘You fool! This night your soul will be required of you; then whose will those things be which you have provided?’

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:20 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:20 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And God seide to hym, Fool, in this nyyt thei schulen take thi lijf fro thee. And whos schulen tho thingis be, that thou hast arayed? ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] But God sayde vnto him: Thou fole this night will they fetche awaye thy soule agayne from the. Then whose shall thoose thinges be which thou hast provyded? ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But God sayde vnto him: Thou foole, this night shal they requyre thy soule from the, and whose shal it be that thou hast prepared? (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] But God sayd vnto him. Thou fole, this nyght will they fetche awaye thy soule agayne from the. Then whose shall those thynges be, which thou hast prouided? ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] But God sayed vnto hym: Thou fole, thys nyghte wyll they fetche awaye thy soule agayne from the. Then whose shall these thinges be which thou haste prouyded? ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] But God sayde vnto hym: Thou foole, this nyght wyll they fetch awaye thy soule againe fro thee: Then whose shall those thynges be, which thou hast prouided? ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] But God said vnto him, O foole, this night wil they fetch away thy soule fro thee: then whose shall those things be which thou hast prouided? ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] But God said vnto him, Thou foole, this night thy soule shal be required of thee: then whose shal those things be which thou hast prouided? ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] but God said to him, thou fool, this night shall thy soul be required of thee: who then shall enjoy what thou hast provided? ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be which thou hast provided; (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be, which thou hast provided? ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night shall thy soul be required of thee; then whose shall those things be which thou hast provided? (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But God said to him, Thou fool, this night they require thy soul of thee: and whose shall the things be that thou hast provided? (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But God said to him, Thou fool! this night shall they demand thy life from thee; and the things which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] But God said to him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be which thou hast provided? (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] But God said to him, Fool! this very night your soul is required of you. Whose, then, shall those things be, which you have provided? (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But Aloha said to him, Reasonless (man)! this night thy soul they shall require of thee; and then, (the things) which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] But God said to him, Foolish man, this night they shall require your soul from you; and who then will have the goods which you have provided? (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Said but to him the God: O unwise, this the night the life of thee they require from thee; what and thou hast prepared, for whom shall be? ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] But God said to him: Fool! this night thy soul shall be required of thee; and whose shall those things be, which thou didst provide? (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] But God said to him, Fool! this night will thy soul he required of thee; and whose will those things be which thou hast laid up? (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] But God said unto him, Thou fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be, which thou hast provided? ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] But God said unto him, Thou foolish one, this night is thy soul required of thee; and the things which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But God said to him, Fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee; and whose shall be what thou hast prepared? (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `And God said to him, Unthinking one! this night thy soul they shall require from thee, and what things thou didst prepare -- to whom shall they be? ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] But God said unto him, Thou foolish one, this night is thy soul required of thee; and the things which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But God said unto him––Simple one! on this very night, they are asking, thy soul, from thee; The things, then, which thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But God said to him, Thou fool, this night they are demanding thy soul from thee; and to whom shall those things which thou hast prepared, belong? (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But God said to him, 'Senseless one! this night they require your soul of you; and the things you prepared, whose shall they be?' (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But God said to the man 'Fool! This very night your life is being demanded; and as for all that you have prepared—who will have it?' (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "But God said to him, "'Foolish man, this night your life is demanded from you; and these preparations—for whom shall they be?' (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But God said to him: Senseless man, this night shall they require thy soul of thee: but the things that thou hast prepared, whose shall they be? (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* فقال له الله يا غبي هذه الليلة تطلب نفسك منك. فهذه التي اعددتها لمن تكون. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Baina erran cieçón Iaincoac, Erhoá, gaurco gauèan eure arimá edequiren çaic: eta dituán gauçác, noren içanen dirade?

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 神却对他说：无知的人哪，今夜必要你的灵魂；你所预备的要归谁呢？ (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 神卻對他說：無知的人哪，今夜必要你的靈魂；你所預備的要歸誰呢？ (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Mais Dieu lui dit: Insense! cette nuit meme ton ame te sera redemandee; et ces choses que tu as preparees, à qui seront-elles? (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Mais Dieu lui dit : insensé, en cette même nuit ton âme te sera redemandée; et les choses que tu as préparées, à qui seront-elles? (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Aber Gott sprach zu ihm: Du Narr! diese Nacht wird man deine Seele von dir fordern; und wes wird's sein, das du bereitet hast? (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ma Iddio gli disse: Stolto, questa stessa notte, l’anima tua ti sarà ridomandata; e di cui saranno le cose che tu hai apparecchiate? (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Ma Dio gli disse: Stolto, questa notte stessa l’anima tua ti sarà ridomandata; e quel che hai preparato, di chi sarà? (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* dixit autem illi Deus stulte hac nocte animam tuam repetunt a te quae autem parasti cuius erunt [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] Но Бог сказал ему: безумный! в сию ночь душу твою возьмут у тебя; кому же достанется то, что ты заготовил? [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men Gud sade till honom: 'Du dåre, i denna natt skall din själ utkrävas av dig; vem skall då få vad du har samlat i förråd?' -- (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] Datapuwa't sinabi sa kaniya ng Dios, Ikaw na haling, hihingin sa iyo sa gabing ito ang iyong kaluluwa; at ang mga bagay na inihanda mo, ay mapapa sa kanino kaya? (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Song Ðức Chúa Trời phán cùng người rằng: Hỡi kẻ dại! Chính đêm nay linh hồn ngươi sẽ bị đòi lại; vậy những của cải ngươi đã sắm sẵn sẽ thuộc về ai? (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:20 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:19

2018-12-26T14:35:18Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:19}}
* '''[[Luke 12:19 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:19]]''' [[2532|καὶ]] [[2046|ἐρῶ]] [[3588|τῇ]] [[5590|ψυχῇ]] [[3450|μου]], [[5590|Ψυχή]], [[2192|ἔχεις]] [[4183|πολλὰ]] [[18|ἀγαθὰ]] [[2749|κείμενα]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[2094|ἔτη]] [[4183|πολλά]]· [[373|ἀναπαύου]], [[5315|φάγε]], [[4095|πίε]], [[2165|εὐφραίνου]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:19''' And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:19 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:19]]''' And I will say to my soul, “Soul, you have many goods laid up for many years; take your ease; eat, drink, and be merry.”’

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:19 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:19 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And Y schal seie to my soule, Soule, thou hast many goodis kept in to ful many yeeris; rest thou, ete, drynke, and make feeste. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] and I will saye to my soule: Soule thou hast moch goodes layde vp in stoore for many yeares take thyne ease: eate drinke and be mery. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] & wil saye vnto my soule: Soule, thou hast moch goodes layed vp in stoare for many yeares, take now thine ease, eate, drinke, and be mery. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] and I will saye to my soule: Soule thou hast moche goodes layd vp in stoore for many yeares, take thyne ease: eate, drincke, be mery. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] and I wyll saye to my soule: Soule thou hast muche goodes layde vp in store for many yeares: take thyne ease, eate, drinke, and be mery. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And I wyll saye to my soule: Soule, thou hast much goods layed vp [in store] for many yeres, take thyne ease, eate, drynke, and be mery. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And I wil say to my soule, Soule, thou hast much goods laide vp for many yeeres: liue at ease, eate, drinke and take thy pastime. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And I will say to my soule, Soule, thou hast much goods layd vp for many yeeres, take thine ease, eate, drinke, and be merry. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] then I will say to my soul, soul, you have many enjoyments in reserve for a number of years; take your ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods; Be merry. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast plenty of goods laid up for many years, take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years: take thine ease; eat, drink, be merry. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast a multitude of good things in store for many years, be at ease, eat, drink, and be merry! (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast abundance of goods laid up for many years; take thy ease, eat, drink, and be merry. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast plenty of goods laid up for many years; take thin ease, eat, drink, enjoy thyself. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] and I will say to my soul, My soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years: be at ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, you have many goods laid up for many years rest, eat, drink, and enjoy yourself. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] and I will say to the soul of me: Soul, thou hast many good things being laid up for years many; rest thou, eat, drink, be glad. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And I will say to my soul: Soul, thou hast many goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast many goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much good things laid by for many years; repose thyself, eat, drink, be merry. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years, be resting, eat, drink, be merry. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] and will say to my soul––Soul! thou hast many good things [lying by for many years: be taking thy rest, eat, drink,] be making merry! (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, you have much goods laid up for many years; take your ease, eat, drink, be merry.' (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] and I will say to myself, Now you have plenty of good things put by for many years; take your ease, eat, drink, and enjoy yourself.' (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] and I will say to my life, "'Life, you have ample possessions laid up for many years to come: take your ease, eat, drink, enjoy yourself.' (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] and I will say to my soul: Soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years: rest, eat, drink, be merry. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> واقول لنفسي يا نفس لك خيرات كثيرة موضوعة لسنين كثيرة. استريحي وكلي واشربي وافرحي. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eta erranen draucat neure arimari, Arimá, badituc on handiac anhitz vrthetacozat bilduac: reposa adi, ian eçac, edan eçac, eta atseguin har eçac.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:19) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:19 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* je dirai à mon ame: Mon ame, tu as beaucoup de biens assembles pour beaucoup d'annees; repose-toi, mange, bois, fais grande chere. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Puis je dirai à mon âme : mon âme, tu as beaucoup de biens assemblés pour beaucoup d'années, repose-toi, mange, bois, et fais grande chère. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] und will sagen zu meiner Seele: Liebe Seele, du hast einen großen Vorrat auf viele Jahre; habe nun Ruhe, iß, trink und habe guten Mut! (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] E dirò all’anima mia: Anima, tu hai molti beni, riposti per molti anni, quietati, mangia, bevi, e godi. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] e dirò all’anima mia: Anima, tu hai molti beni riposti per molti anni; riposati, mangia, bevi, godi. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* et dicam animae meae anima habes multa bona posita in annos plurimos requiesce comede bibe epulare [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] и скажу душе моей: душа! много добра лежит у тебя на многие годы: покойся,ешь, пей, веселись. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:19 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Hapo nitaweza kuiambia roho yangu: sasa unayo akiba ya matumizi kwa miaka na miaka. Ponda mali, ule, unywe na kufurahi.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Sedan vill jag säga till min själ: Kära själ, du har mycket gott för varat för många år; giv dig nu ro, ät, drick och var glad. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sasabihin ko sa aking kaluluwa, Kaluluwa, marami ka nang pag-aaring nakakamalig para sa maraming taon; magpahingalay ka, kumain ka, uminom ka, matuwa ka. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] rồi sẽ nói với linh hồn ta rằng: Linh hồn ơi, mầy đã được nhiều của để dành dùng lâu năm; thôi, hãy nghỉ, ăn uống, và vui vẻ. (Lu-ca 12:19 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:19 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:19

2018-12-26T14:34:33Z

Beza 1598:

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:19}}
* '''[[Luke 12:19 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:19]]''' [[2532|καὶ]] [[2046|ἐρῶ]] [[3588|τῇ]] [[5590|ψυχῇ]] [[3450|μου]], [[5590|Ψυχή]], [[2192|ἔχεις]] [[4183|πολλὰ]] [[18|ἀγαθὰ]] [[2749|κείμενα]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[2094|ἔτη]] [[4183|πολλά]]· [[373|ἀναπαύου]], [[5315|φάγε]], [[4095|πίε]], [[2165|εὐφραίνου]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:19''' And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:19 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:19]]''' And I will say to my soul, “Soul, you have many goods laid up for many years; take your ease; eat, drink, and be merry.”’

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:19 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:19 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And Y schal seie to my soule, Soule, thou hast many goodis kept in to ful many yeeris; rest thou, ete, drynke, and make feeste. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] and I will saye to my soule: Soule thou hast moch goodes layde vp in stoore for many yeares take thyne ease: eate drinke and be mery. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] & wil saye vnto my soule: Soule, thou hast moch goodes layed vp in stoare for many yeares, take now thine ease, eate, drinke, and be mery. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] and I will saye to my soule: Soule thou hast moche goodes layd vp in stoore for many yeares, take thyne ease: eate, drincke, be mery. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] and I wyll saye to my soule: Soule thou hast muche goodes layde vp in store for many yeares: take thyne ease, eate, drinke, and be mery. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And I wyll saye to my soule: Soule, thou hast much goods layed vp [in store] for many yeres, take thyne ease, eate, drynke, and be mery. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And I wil say to my soule, Soule, thou hast much goods laide vp for many yeeres: liue at ease, eate, drinke and take thy pastime. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And I will say to my soule, Soule, thou hast much goods layd vp for many yeeres, take thine ease, eate, drinke, and be merry. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] then I will say to my soul, soul, you have many enjoyments in reserve for a number of years; take your ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods; Be merry. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast plenty of goods laid up for many years, take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years: take thine ease; eat, drink, be merry. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast a multitude of good things in store for many years, be at ease, eat, drink, and be merry! (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast abundance of goods laid up for many years; take thy ease, eat, drink, and be merry. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast plenty of goods laid up for many years; take thin ease, eat, drink, enjoy thyself. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] and I will say to my soul, My soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years: be at ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, you have many goods laid up for many years rest, eat, drink, and enjoy yourself. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] and I will say to the soul of me: Soul, thou hast many good things being laid up for years many; rest thou, eat, drink, be glad. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And I will say to my soul: Soul, thou hast many goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast many goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much good things laid by for many years; repose thyself, eat, drink, be merry. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years, be resting, eat, drink, be merry. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] and will say to my soul––Soul! thou hast many good things [lying by for many years: be taking thy rest, eat, drink,] be making merry! (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, you have much goods laid up for many years; take your ease, eat, drink, be merry.' (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] and I will say to myself, Now you have plenty of good things put by for many years; take your ease, eat, drink, and enjoy yourself.' (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] and I will say to my life, "'Life, you have ample possessions laid up for many years to come: take your ease, eat, drink, enjoy yourself.' (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] and I will say to my soul: Soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years: rest, eat, drink, be merry. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> وقال اعمل هذا. اهدم مخازني وابني اعظم واجمع هناك جميع غلاتي وخيراتي. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eta erran ceçan, Haur eguinen dut: deseguinen ditut neure granerac, eta handiagoac eguinen ditut: eta hara bilduren ditut neure fructu guciac, eta neure onac.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:18) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:18 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Et il dit: voici ce que je ferai: j'abattrai mes greniers et j'en batirai de plus grands, et j'y assemblerai tous mes produits et mes biens; (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Puis il dit : voici ce que je ferai : j'abattrai mes greniers, et j'en bâtirai de plus grands, et j'y assemblerai tous mes revenus et mes biens; (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Und sprach: Das will ich tun: ich will meine Scheunen abbrechen und größere bauen und will drein sammeln alles, was mir gewachsen ist, und meine Güter; (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Poi disse: Questo farò: io disfarò i miei granai, e ne edificherò di maggiori, e quivi riporrò tutte le mie entrate, e i miei beni. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Questo farò: demolirò i miei granai e ne fabbricherò dei più vasti, e vi raccoglierò tutto il mio grano e i miei beni, (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* et dixit hoc faciam destruam horrea mea et maiora faciam et illuc congregabo omnia quae nata sunt mihi et bona mea [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] И сказал: вот что сделаю: сломаю житницы мои и построю большие, и соберу тудавесь хлеб мой и все добро мое, [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:18 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Nitafanya hivi: nitabomoa ghala zangu na kujenga kubwa zaidi, na humo nitahifadhi mavuno yangu yote na mali yangu.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Därefter sade han: 'Så vill jag göra: jag vill riva ned mina lador och bygga upp större, och i dem skall jag samla in all min gröda och allt mitt goda. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinabi niya, Ito ang gagawin ko: igigiba ko ang aking mga bangan, at gagawa ako ng lalong malalaki; at doon ko ilalagay ang lahat ng aking butil at aking mga pag-aari. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Lại nói: Nầy, việc ta sẽ làm: ta phá cả kho tàng và cất cái khác lớn hơn, thâu trử sản vật và gia tài vào đó; (Lu-ca 12:18 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:19 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:19

2018-12-26T14:29:56Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

Luke 12:19

2018-12-26T14:28:47Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:19}}
* '''[[Luke 12:19 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:19]]''' [[2532|καὶ]] [[2046|ἐρῶ]] [[3588|τῇ]] [[5590|ψυχῇ]] [[3450|μου]], [[5590|Ψυχή]], [[2192|ἔχεις]] [[4183|πολλὰ]] [[18|ἀγαθὰ]] [[2749|κείμενα]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[2094|ἔτη]] [[4183|πολλά]]· [[373|ἀναπαύου]], [[5315|φάγε]], [[4095|πίε]], [[2165|εὐφραίνου]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:19''' And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:19 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:19]]''' And I will say to my soul, “Soul, you have many goods laid up for many years; take your ease; eat, drink, and be merry.”’

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:19 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:19 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And Y schal seie to my soule, Soule, thou hast many goodis kept in to ful many yeeris; rest thou, ete, drynke, and make feeste. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] and I will saye to my soule: Soule thou hast moch goodes layde vp in stoore for many yeares take thyne ease: eate drinke and be mery. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] & wil saye vnto my soule: Soule, thou hast moch goodes layed vp in stoare for many yeares, take now thine ease, eate, drinke, and be mery. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] and I will saye to my soule: Soule thou hast moche goodes layd vp in stoore for many yeares, take thyne ease: eate, drincke, be mery. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] and I wyll saye to my soule: Soule thou hast muche goodes layde vp in store for many yeares: take thyne ease, eate, drinke, and be mery. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And I wyll saye to my soule: Soule, thou hast much goods layed vp [in store] for many yeres, take thyne ease, eate, drynke, and be mery. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And I wil say to my soule, Soule, thou hast much goods laide vp for many yeeres: liue at ease, eate, drinke and take thy pastime. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And I will say to my soule, Soule, thou hast much goods layd vp for many yeeres, take thine ease, eate, drinke, and be merry. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] then I will say to my soul, soul, you have many enjoyments in reserve for a number of years; take your ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods; Be merry. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast plenty of goods laid up for many years, take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years: take thine ease; eat, drink, be merry. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast a multitude of good things in store for many years, be at ease, eat, drink, and be merry! (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast abundance of goods laid up for many years; take thy ease, eat, drink, and be merry. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast plenty of goods laid up for many years; take thin ease, eat, drink, enjoy thyself. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] and I will say to my soul, My soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years: be at ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, you have many goods laid up for many years rest, eat, drink, and enjoy yourself. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] and I will say to the soul of me: Soul, thou hast many good things being laid up for years many; rest thou, eat, drink, be glad. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And I will say to my soul: Soul, thou hast many goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast many goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much good things laid by for many years; repose thyself, eat, drink, be merry. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years, be resting, eat, drink, be merry. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] and will say to my soul––Soul! thou hast many good things [lying by for many years: be taking thy rest, eat, drink,] be making merry! (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, you have much goods laid up for many years; take your ease, eat, drink, be merry.' (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] and I will say to myself, Now you have plenty of good things put by for many years; take your ease, eat, drink, and enjoy yourself.' (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] and I will say to my life, "'Life, you have ample possessions laid up for many years to come: take your ease, eat, drink, enjoy yourself.' (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] and I will say to my soul: Soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years: rest, eat, drink, be merry. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

x==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> واقول لنفسي يا نفس لك خيرات كثيرة موضوعة لسنين كثيرة. استريحي وكلي واشربي وافرحي. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eta erranen draucat neure arimari, Arimá, badituc on handiac anhitz vrthetacozat bilduac: reposa adi, ian eçac, edan eçac, eta atseguin har eçac.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:19) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:19 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* je dirai à mon ame: Mon ame, tu as beaucoup de biens assembles pour beaucoup d'annees; repose-toi, mange, bois, fais grande chere. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Puis je dirai à mon âme : mon âme, tu as beaucoup de biens assemblés pour beaucoup d'années, repose-toi, mange, bois, et fais grande chère. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] und will sagen zu meiner Seele: Liebe Seele, du hast einen großen Vorrat auf viele Jahre; habe nun Ruhe, iß, trink und habe guten Mut! (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] E dirò all’anima mia: Anima, tu hai molti beni, riposti per molti anni, quietati, mangia, bevi, e godi. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] e dirò all’anima mia: Anima, tu hai molti beni riposti per molti anni; riposati, mangia, bevi, godi. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* et dicam animae meae anima habes multa bona posita in annos plurimos requiesce comede bibe epulare [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] и скажу душе моей: душа! много добра лежит у тебя на многие годы: покойся,ешь, пей, веселись. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:19 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Hapo nitaweza kuiambia roho yangu: sasa unayo akiba ya matumizi kwa miaka na miaka. Ponda mali, ule, unywe na kufurahi.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Sedan vill jag säga till min själ: Kära själ, du har mycket gott för varat för många år; giv dig nu ro, ät, drick och var glad. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sasabihin ko sa aking kaluluwa, Kaluluwa, marami ka nang pag-aaring nakakamalig para sa maraming taon; magpahingalay ka, kumain ka, uminom ka, matuwa ka. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] rồi sẽ nói với linh hồn ta rằng: Linh hồn ơi, mầy đã được nhiều của để dành dùng lâu năm; thôi, hãy nghỉ, ăn uống, và vui vẻ. (Lu-ca 12:19 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:19 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:19

2018-12-26T14:28:28Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:19}}
* '''[[Luke 12:19 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:19]]''' [[2532|καὶ]] [[2046|ἐρῶ]] [[3588|τῇ]] [[5590|ψυχῇ]] [[3450|μου]], [[5590|Ψυχή]], [[2192|ἔχεις]] [[4183|πολλὰ]] [[18|ἀγαθὰ]] [[2749|κείμενα]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[2094|ἔτη]] [[4183|πολλά]]· [[373|ἀναπαύου]], [[5315|φάγε]], [[4095|πίε]], [[2165|εὐφραίνου]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:19''' And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:19 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:19]]''' And I will say to my soul, “Soul, you have many goods laid up for many years; take your ease; eat, drink, and be merry.”’

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:19 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:19 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And Y schal seie to my soule, Soule, thou hast many goodis kept in to ful many yeeris; rest thou, ete, drynke, and make feeste. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] and I will saye to my soule: Soule thou hast moch goodes layde vp in stoore for many yeares take thyne ease: eate drinke and be mery. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] & wil saye vnto my soule: Soule, thou hast moch goodes layed vp in stoare for many yeares, take now thine ease, eate, drinke, and be mery. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] and I will saye to my soule: Soule thou hast moche goodes layd vp in stoore for many yeares, take thyne ease: eate, drincke, be mery. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] and I wyll saye to my soule: Soule thou hast muche goodes layde vp in store for many yeares: take thyne ease, eate, drinke, and be mery. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And I wyll saye to my soule: Soule, thou hast much goods layed vp [in store] for many yeres, take thyne ease, eate, drynke, and be mery. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And I wil say to my soule, Soule, thou hast much goods laide vp for many yeeres: liue at ease, eate, drinke and take thy pastime. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And I will say to my soule, Soule, thou hast much goods layd vp for many yeeres, take thine ease, eate, drinke, and be merry. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] then I will say to my soul, soul, you have many enjoyments in reserve for a number of years; take your ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods; Be merry. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast plenty of goods laid up for many years, take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years: take thine ease; eat, drink, be merry. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast a multitude of good things in store for many years, be at ease, eat, drink, and be merry! (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast abundance of goods laid up for many years; take thy ease, eat, drink, and be merry. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast plenty of goods laid up for many years; take thin ease, eat, drink, enjoy thyself. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] and I will say to my soul, My soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years: be at ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, you have many goods laid up for many years rest, eat, drink, and enjoy yourself. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] and I will say to the soul of me: Soul, thou hast many good things being laid up for years many; rest thou, eat, drink, be glad. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And I will say to my soul: Soul, thou hast many goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast many goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, and be merry. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much good things laid by for many years; repose thyself, eat, drink, be merry. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years, be resting, eat, drink, be merry. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] and will say to my soul––Soul! thou hast many good things [lying by for many years: be taking thy rest, eat, drink,] be making merry! (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, be merry. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And I will say to my soul, Soul, you have much goods laid up for many years; take your ease, eat, drink, be merry.' (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] and I will say to myself, Now you have plenty of good things put by for many years; take your ease, eat, drink, and enjoy yourself.' (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] and I will say to my life, "'Life, you have ample possessions laid up for many years to come: take your ease, eat, drink, enjoy yourself.' (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] and I will say to my soul: Soul, thou hast many good things laid up for many years: rest, eat, drink, be merry. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* واقول لنفسي يا نفس لك خيرات كثيرة موضوعة لسنين كثيرة. استريحي وكلي واشربي وافرحي. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Eta erranen draucat neure arimari, Arimá, badituc on handiac anhitz vrthetacozat bilduac: reposa adi, ian eçac, edan eçac, eta atseguin har eçac.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 然後要对我的灵魂说：灵魂哪，你有许多财物积存，可作多年的费用，只管安安逸逸的吃喝快乐罢！ (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 然後要對我的靈魂說：靈魂哪，你有許多財物積存，可作多年的費用，只管安安逸逸的吃喝快樂罷！ (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* je dirai à mon ame: Mon ame, tu as beaucoup de biens assembles pour beaucoup d'annees; repose-toi, mange, bois, fais grande chere. (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Puis je dirai à mon âme : mon âme, tu as beaucoup de biens assemblés pour beaucoup d'années, repose-toi, mange, bois, et fais grande chère. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] und will sagen zu meiner Seele: Liebe Seele, du hast einen großen Vorrat auf viele Jahre; habe nun Ruhe, iß, trink und habe guten Mut! (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] E dirò all’anima mia: Anima, tu hai molti beni, riposti per molti anni, quietati, mangia, bevi, e godi. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] e dirò all’anima mia: Anima, tu hai molti beni riposti per molti anni; riposati, mangia, bevi, godi. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* et dicam animae meae anima habes multa bona posita in annos plurimos requiesce comede bibe epulare [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] и скажу душе моей: душа! много добра лежит у тебя на многие годы: покойся,ешь, пей, веселись. [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Sedan vill jag säga till min själ: Kära själ, du har mycket gott för varat för många år; giv dig nu ro, ät, drick och var glad. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sasabihin ko sa aking kaluluwa, Kaluluwa, marami ka nang pag-aaring nakakamalig para sa maraming taon; magpahingalay ka, kumain ka, uminom ka, matuwa ka. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] rồi sẽ nói với linh hồn ta rằng: Linh hồn ơi, mầy đã được nhiều của để dành dùng lâu năm; thôi, hãy nghỉ, ăn uống, và vui vẻ. (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:19 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:18

2018-12-26T14:27:50Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:18}}
* '''[[Luke 12:18 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:18]]''' [[2532|καὶ]] [[2036|εἶπε]], [[5124|Τοῦτο]] [[4160|ποιήσω]]· [[2507|καθελῶ]] [[3450|μου]] [[3588|τὰς]] [[596|ἀποθήκας]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[3173|μείζονας]] [[3618|οἰκοδομήσω]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[4863|συνάξω]] [[1563|ἐκεῖ]] [[3956|πάντα]] [[3588|τὰ]] [[1081|γενήματά]] [[3450|μου]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|τὰ]] [[18|ἀγαθά]] [[3450|μου]],

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:18''' And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my fruits and my goods.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:18 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:18]]''' So he said, ‘I will do this: I will pull down my barns and build greater, and there I will store all my crops and my goods.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:18 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:18 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And he seith, This thing Y schal do; Y schal throwe doun my bernes, and Y schal make gretter, and thidir Y schal gadir alle thingis that growen to me, and my goodis. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] And he sayde: This will I do. I will destroye my barnes and bilde greater and therin will I gadder all my frutes and my goodes: ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] And he sayde: This wil I do, I wil breake downe my barnes, & buylde greater, and therin wil I gather all myne increace, & my goodes, (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] And he sayd: This will I do. I will destroye my barnes, and bylde greater, and therin will I gather all my goodes that are growen vnto me: ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] And he sayed: Thys will I do. I wyl destroy my barnes, and buylde greater, and therein wyll I gather all my frutes, and my goodes, ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And he sayde, this wyll I do, I wyll destroy my barnes, and buylde greater, and therin wyll I gather all my fruites and my goodes. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And he said, This wil I do, I wil pul downe my barnes, and builde greater, and therein will I gather all my fruites, and my goods. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And he said, This will I doe, I will pull downe my barnes, and build greater, and there will I bestow all my fruits, and my goods. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] this will I do, said he, I will pull down my barns, and build greater: and there I will bestow all my rich product. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and make them greater; and there will I collect all my fruits. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my fruits and my goods. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And he said, This I will do: I will pull down my barns, and build larger ones; and there I will bestow all my products and my goods. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] For I have no room where to stow my fruits. And he said, This I will do: I will pull down my barns and build greater; and there will I stow all my fruits and goods. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And he said, I will do this; I will take down my barns, and build them larger, and collect there all my crops, and my good things! (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I deposit all my fruits and my goods. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] I will do this, added he; I will pull down my storehouses, and build larger, and there I will store all my produce, and my goods. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And he said, This will I do: I will destroy my house of stores, and will build and enlarge it; and there will I collect all my provender and my good things: ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And he said, I will do this; I will take down my storehouses and build greater; and there will I bring together all my produce and my goods; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he said: This will do; I will pull down of me the barns, and greater I will build; and I will collect there all the products of me, and the fruits of me; ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he said: This will I do; I will pull down my barns, and will build greater; and there I will store all my fruits and my goods. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And he said, This will I do; I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I store all my crops and my goods; (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my fruits and my goods. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my corn and my goods. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] And he said, This will I do: I will take away my granaries and build greater, and there I will lay up all my produce and my good things; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and he said, This I will do, I will take down my storehouses, and greater ones I will build, and I will gather together there all my products and my good things, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my grain and my goods. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And he said––This, will I do,––I will pull down my barns, and, greater ones, build, and gather, there, all my wheat and good things; (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And he said, I will do this: I will take down my barns, and build greater, and there I will gather all my fruits and my goods. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And he said, 'This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build larger ones; and there will I store all my grain and my goods. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] This is what I will do,' he said; 'I will pull down my barns and build larger ones, and store all my grain and my goods in them; (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "And he said to himself, "'This is what I will do: I will pull down my barns and build larger ones, and in them I will store up all my harvest and my wealth; (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] And he said: This will I do; I will pull down my barns and build greater, and there will I gather in all my produce and my good things; (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> وقال اعمل هذا. اهدم مخازني وابني اعظم واجمع هناك جميع غلاتي وخيراتي. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eta erran ceçan, Haur eguinen dut: deseguinen ditut neure granerac, eta handiagoac eguinen ditut: eta hara bilduren ditut neure fructu guciac, eta neure onac.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:18) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:18 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Et il dit: voici ce que je ferai: j'abattrai mes greniers et j'en batirai de plus grands, et j'y assemblerai tous mes produits et mes biens; (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Puis il dit : voici ce que je ferai : j'abattrai mes greniers, et j'en bâtirai de plus grands, et j'y assemblerai tous mes revenus et mes biens; (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Und sprach: Das will ich tun: ich will meine Scheunen abbrechen und größere bauen und will drein sammeln alles, was mir gewachsen ist, und meine Güter; (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Poi disse: Questo farò: io disfarò i miei granai, e ne edificherò di maggiori, e quivi riporrò tutte le mie entrate, e i miei beni. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Questo farò: demolirò i miei granai e ne fabbricherò dei più vasti, e vi raccoglierò tutto il mio grano e i miei beni, (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* et dixit hoc faciam destruam horrea mea et maiora faciam et illuc congregabo omnia quae nata sunt mihi et bona mea [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] И сказал: вот что сделаю: сломаю житницы мои и построю большие, и соберу тудавесь хлеб мой и все добро мое, [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:18 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Nitafanya hivi: nitabomoa ghala zangu na kujenga kubwa zaidi, na humo nitahifadhi mavuno yangu yote na mali yangu.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Därefter sade han: 'Så vill jag göra: jag vill riva ned mina lador och bygga upp större, och i dem skall jag samla in all min gröda och allt mitt goda. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinabi niya, Ito ang gagawin ko: igigiba ko ang aking mga bangan, at gagawa ako ng lalong malalaki; at doon ko ilalagay ang lahat ng aking butil at aking mga pag-aari. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Lại nói: Nầy, việc ta sẽ làm: ta phá cả kho tàng và cất cái khác lớn hơn, thâu trử sản vật và gia tài vào đó; (Lu-ca 12:18 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:18 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:18

2018-12-26T14:21:34Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:18}}
* '''[[Luke 12:18 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:18]]''' [[2532|καὶ]] [[2036|εἶπε]], [[5124|Τοῦτο]] [[4160|ποιήσω]]· [[2507|καθελῶ]] [[3450|μου]] [[3588|τὰς]] [[596|ἀποθήκας]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[3173|μείζονας]] [[3618|οἰκοδομήσω]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[4863|συνάξω]] [[1563|ἐκεῖ]] [[3956|πάντα]] [[3588|τὰ]] [[1081|γενήματά]] [[3450|μου]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|τὰ]] [[18|ἀγαθά]] [[3450|μου]],

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:18''' And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my fruits and my goods.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:18 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:18]]''' So he said, ‘I will do this: I will pull down my barns and build greater, and there I will store all my crops and my goods.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:18 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:18 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And he seith, This thing Y schal do; Y schal throwe doun my bernes, and Y schal make gretter, and thidir Y schal gadir alle thingis that growen to me, and my goodis. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] And he sayde: This will I do. I will destroye my barnes and bilde greater and therin will I gadder all my frutes and my goodes: ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] And he sayde: This wil I do, I wil breake downe my barnes, & buylde greater, and therin wil I gather all myne increace, & my goodes, (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] And he sayd: This will I do. I will destroye my barnes, and bylde greater, and therin will I gather all my goodes that are growen vnto me: ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] And he sayed: Thys will I do. I wyl destroy my barnes, and buylde greater, and therein wyll I gather all my frutes, and my goodes, ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And he sayde, this wyll I do, I wyll destroy my barnes, and buylde greater, and therin wyll I gather all my fruites and my goodes. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And he said, This wil I do, I wil pul downe my barnes, and builde greater, and therein will I gather all my fruites, and my goods. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And he said, This will I doe, I will pull downe my barnes, and build greater, and there will I bestow all my fruits, and my goods. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] this will I do, said he, I will pull down my barns, and build greater: and there I will bestow all my rich product. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and make them greater; and there will I collect all my fruits. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my fruits and my goods. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And he said, This I will do: I will pull down my barns, and build larger ones; and there I will bestow all my products and my goods. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] For I have no room where to stow my fruits. And he said, This I will do: I will pull down my barns and build greater; and there will I stow all my fruits and goods. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And he said, I will do this; I will take down my barns, and build them larger, and collect there all my crops, and my good things! (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I deposit all my fruits and my goods. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] I will do this, added he; I will pull down my storehouses, and build larger, and there I will store all my produce, and my goods. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And he said, This will I do: I will destroy my house of stores, and will build and enlarge it; and there will I collect all my provender and my good things: ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And he said, I will do this; I will take down my storehouses and build greater; and there will I bring together all my produce and my goods; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he said: This will do; I will pull down of me the barns, and greater I will build; and I will collect there all the products of me, and the fruits of me; ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he said: This will I do; I will pull down my barns, and will build greater; and there I will store all my fruits and my goods. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And he said, This will I do; I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I store all my crops and my goods; (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my fruits and my goods. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my corn and my goods. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] And he said, This will I do: I will take away my granaries and build greater, and there I will lay up all my produce and my good things; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and he said, This I will do, I will take down my storehouses, and greater ones I will build, and I will gather together there all my products and my good things, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my grain and my goods. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And he said––This, will I do,––I will pull down my barns, and, greater ones, build, and gather, there, all my wheat and good things; (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And he said, I will do this: I will take down my barns, and build greater, and there I will gather all my fruits and my goods. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And he said, 'This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build larger ones; and there will I store all my grain and my goods. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] This is what I will do,' he said; 'I will pull down my barns and build larger ones, and store all my grain and my goods in them; (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "And he said to himself, "'This is what I will do: I will pull down my barns and build larger ones, and in them I will store up all my harvest and my wealth; (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] And he said: This will I do; I will pull down my barns and build greater, and there will I gather in all my produce and my good things; (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* وقال اعمل هذا. اهدم مخازني وابني اعظم واجمع هناك جميع غلاتي وخيراتي. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Eta erran ceçan, Haur eguinen dut: deseguinen ditut neure granerac, eta handiagoac eguinen ditut: eta hara bilduren ditut neure fructu guciac, eta neure onac.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 又说：我要这麽办：要把我的仓房拆了，另盖更大的，在那里好收藏我一切的粮食和财物， (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 又說：我要這麼辦：要把我的倉房拆了，另蓋更大的，在那裡好收藏我一切的糧食和財物， (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Et il dit: voici ce que je ferai: j'abattrai mes greniers et j'en batirai de plus grands, et j'y assemblerai tous mes produits et mes biens; (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Puis il dit : voici ce que je ferai : j'abattrai mes greniers, et j'en bâtirai de plus grands, et j'y assemblerai tous mes revenus et mes biens; (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Und sprach: Das will ich tun: ich will meine Scheunen abbrechen und größere bauen und will drein sammeln alles, was mir gewachsen ist, und meine Güter; (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Poi disse: Questo farò: io disfarò i miei granai, e ne edificherò di maggiori, e quivi riporrò tutte le mie entrate, e i miei beni. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Questo farò: demolirò i miei granai e ne fabbricherò dei più vasti, e vi raccoglierò tutto il mio grano e i miei beni, (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* et dixit hoc faciam destruam horrea mea et maiora faciam et illuc congregabo omnia quae nata sunt mihi et bona mea [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] И сказал: вот что сделаю: сломаю житницы мои и построю большие, и соберу тудавесь хлеб мой и все добро мое, [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Därefter sade han: 'Så vill jag göra: jag vill riva ned mina lador och bygga upp större, och i dem skall jag samla in all min gröda och allt mitt goda. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinabi niya, Ito ang gagawin ko: igigiba ko ang aking mga bangan, at gagawa ako ng lalong malalaki; at doon ko ilalagay ang lahat ng aking butil at aking mga pag-aari. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Lại nói: Nầy, việc ta sẽ làm: ta phá cả kho tàng và cất cái khác lớn hơn, thâu trử sản vật và gia tài vào đó; (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:18 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:17

2018-12-26T14:20:42Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:17}}
* '''[[Luke 12:17 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:17]]''' [[2532|καὶ]] [[1260|διελογίζετο]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[1438|ἑαυτῷ]], [[3004|λέγων]], [[5101|τί]] [[4160|ποιήσω]], [[3754|ὅτι]] [[3756|οὐκ]] [[2192|ἔχω]] [[4226|ποῦ]] [[4863|συνάξω]] [[3588|τοὺς]] [[2890|καρπούς]] [[3450|μου]];

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:17''' And he thought within himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have no room where to bestow my fruits?

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:17 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:17]]''' And he thought within himself, saying, ‘What shall I do, since I have no room to store my crops?’

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:17 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:17 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And he thouyte with ynne hym silf, and seide, What schal Y do, for Y haue not whidur Y schal gadere my fruytis? ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] and he thought in himsilfe sayinge: what shall I do? because I have noo roume where to bestowe my frutes? ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] and he thought in himself, and sayde: What shal I do? I haue nothinge wher in to gather my frutes. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] and he thought within him selfe sayinge: what shall I do? because I haue no roume where to bestowe my frutes? ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] and he thoughte in hym selfe sayinge: what shall I do? because I haue no roume where to bestowe my frutes? ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And he thought within him selfe, saying, What shall I do, because I haue no rowme where to bestow my fruites? ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Therefore he thought with himselfe, saying, What shall I doe, because I haue no roume, where I may lay vp my fruites? ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And he thought within himselfe, saying, What shall I doe, because I haue no roome where to bestow my fruits? ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] and thus he reason'd with himself, what shall I do for want of room to store up my crop? ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And he thought within himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have no room where to bestow my fruits? (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And he thought within himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have no room where to bestow my fruits? ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] and he reasoned within himself, saying, What shall I do? for I have not room to lay up my corn. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] saying, The land of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully. And he reasoned in himself, saying, What shall I do? (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] and he thought within himself, saying, What shall I do? for I have not room where I may house my crops. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And he thought within himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have no room where to deposit my fruits? (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And he reasoned thus with himself, What shall I do? for I have not where to store my crop. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And he thought within himself, and said, What shall I do? for I have not where to collect my provisions. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] and he reasoned in himself, saying, What shall I do, for I have no place where I shall bring together my fruits? (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he reasoned in himself, saying: What shall i do? because not I have where I will gather the fruits of me. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he thought within himself, saying: What shall I do, because I have not where to store my fruits? (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And he thought within himself, saying, What shall I do? for I have not where to store my crops. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] and he thought within himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have no room where to bestow my fruits? ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] and he reasoned within himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have not where to bestow my fruits? (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] And he reasoned within himself saying, What shall I do? for I have not [a place] where I shall lay up my fruits. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and he was reasoning within himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have not where I shall gather together my fruits? ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] and he reasoned within himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have not where to bestow my fruits? ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And he began to deliberate within himself, saying––What shall I do? because I have not where I can gather my fruits. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] and he was reasoning in himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have no place where I shall store my fruits? (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] and he reasoned within himself, saying, 'What shall I do, because I have not where to store my fruits?' (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] and he began to ask himself 'What shall I do, for I have nowhere to store my crops? (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] and he debated within himself, saying, "'What am I to do? for I have no place in which to store my crops.' (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] And he reasoned within himself, saying: What shall I do, for I have not where I shall gather in my fruits? (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> ففكر في نفسه قائلا ماذا اعمل لان ليس لي موضع اجمع فيه اثماري. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eta gogueta eguiten çuen bere baithan, cioela, Cer eguinen dut? ecen eztut nora bil ditzadan neure fructuac.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:17) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:17 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* et il raisonnait en lui-meme, disant: Que ferai-je, car je n'ai pas ou je puisse assembler mes fruits? (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et il pensait en lui-même, disant : que ferai-je, car je n'ai point où je puisse assembler mes fruits? (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Und er gedachte bei sich selbst und sprach: Was soll ich tun? Ich habe nicht, da ich meine Früchte hin sammle. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ed egli ragionava fra sè medesimo, dicendo: Che farò? poichè io non ho ove riporre i miei frutti. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] ed egli ragionava così fra sé medesimo: Che farò, poiché non ho dove riporre i miei raccolti? E disse: (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* et cogitabat intra se dicens quid faciam quod non habeo quo congregem fructus meos [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] и он рассуждал сам с собою: что мне делать? некуда мне собрать плодов моих? [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:17 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Tajiri huyo akafikiri moyoni mwake: Nitafanyaje nami sina mahali pa kuhifadhia mavuno yangu?

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Och han tänkte vid sig själv och sade: 'Vad skall jag göra? Jag har ju icke rum nog för att inbärga min skörd.' (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At iniisip niya sa sarili na sinasabi, Ano ang gagawin ko, sapagka't wala akong mapaglalagyan ng aking mga inaning bunga? (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] người bèn tự nghĩ rằng: Ta phải làm thể nào? Vì không có đủ chỗ chứa hết sản vật. (Lu-ca 12:17 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:17 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:17

2018-12-26T14:20:20Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

Luke 12:16

2018-12-26T14:19:38Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:16}}
* '''[[Luke 12:16 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:16]]''' [[2036|εἶπε]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[3850|παραβολὴν]] [[4314|πρὸς]] [[846|αὐτούς]], [[3004|λέγων]], [[444|Ἀνθρώπου]] [[5100|τινὸς]] [[4145|πλουσίου]] [[2164|εὐφόρησεν]] [[3588|ἡ]] [[5561|χώρα]]·

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:16''' And he spake a parable unto them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully:

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:16 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:16]]''' Then He spoke a parable to them, saying: “The ground of a certain rich man yielded plentifully.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:16 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:16 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And he tolde to hem a liknesse, and seide, The feeld of a riche man brouyte forth plenteuouse fruytis. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] And he put forth a similitude vnto them sayinge: The groude of a certayne riche ma brought forth frutes plenteously ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] And he tolde them a symilitude, and sayde: There was a riche man, whose felde had brought forth frutes plenteously, (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] And he put forth a simylytude vnto them sayinge: The grounde of a certaine riche man brought forth plentifull frutes, ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] And he put forth a simylitude vnto them, sayinge. The grounde of a certayne ryche man brought forth frutes plenteouslye, ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And he put foorth a similitude vnto the, saying: The grounde of a certaine ryche man brought foorth plentifull fruites. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And he put foorth a parable vnto them, saying, The grounde of a certaine riche man brought foorth fruites plenteously. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And he spake a parable vnto them, saying, The ground of a certaine rich man brought foorth plentifully. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] to which purpose he propos'd to them this parable: a rich man had some land that was very fruitful. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And he spake a parable unto them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And he spake a parable unto them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully: ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And He spake a parable to them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully: (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And he spake a parable to them, (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And he spake a parable unto them, saying, The estate of a certain rich man bore plentifully: (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And he spoke a parable to them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully: (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] He also used this example, A certain rich man had lands which brought forth plentifully. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And he spake a parable to them: The ground of a certain rich man produced him much provisions. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And he told them a parable, saying, The farm of a certain rich man produced abundantly; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] He spoke and a parable to them, saying: A man certain rich yielded plentifully the farm. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he spoke a parable to them, saying: The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And he spoke a parable to them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And he spake a parable unto them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully: ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And he spake a parable unto them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully: (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] And he spoke a parable to them, saying, The land of a certain rich man brought forth abundantly. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] And he spake a simile unto them, saying, `Of a certain rich man the field brought forth well; ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And he spake a parable unto them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully: ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And he spake a parable unto them, saying––A certain rich man’s estate, bare well. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] He spake a parable to them, saying, The farm of a certain rich man was very productive: (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And He spake a parable to them, saying, "A certain rich man's field yielded bountifully; (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Then Jesus told them this parable—"There was once a rich man whose land was very fertile; (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] And He spoke a parable to them. "A certain rich man's lands," He said, "yielded abundant crops, (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] And he spoke a parable to them, saying: The ground of a certain rich man brought forth abundantly. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> وضرب لهم مثلا قائلا. انسان غني اخصبت كورته. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eta erran ciecén comparationebat, cioela, Guiçon abrats baten landéc abundantqui fructu ekarri vkan duté:

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:16) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:16 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Et il leur dit une parabole, disant: Les champs d'un homme riche avaient beaucoup rapporte; (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et il leur dit cette parabole : Les champs d'un homme riche avaient rapporté en abondance; (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Und er sagte ihnen ein Gleichnis und sprach: Es war ein reicher Mensch, das Feld hatte wohl getragen. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ed egli disse loro una parabola: Le possessioni d’un uomo ricco fruttarono copiosamente. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] E disse loro questa parabola: La campagna d’un certo uomo ricco fruttò copiosamente; (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* dixit autem similitudinem ad illos dicens hominis cuiusdam divitis uberes fructus ager adtulit [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] И сказал им притчу: у одного богатого человека был хороший урожай в поле; [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:16 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Kisha akawaambia mfano: "Kulikuwa na tajiri mmoja ambaye shamba lake lilizaa mavuno mengi.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Och han framställde för dem en liknelse; han sade: »Det var en rik man vilkens åkrar buro ymniga skördar. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At nagsaysay siya sa kanila ng isang talinghaga, na sinasabi, Ang lupa ng isang taong mayaman ay namumunga ng sagana: (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ngài lại phán cùng chúng lời vinh dự nầy: Ruộng của một người giàu kia sinh lợi nhiều lắm, (Lu-ca 12:16 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:16 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:16

2018-12-26T14:19:06Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

Luke 12:15

2018-12-26T14:18:32Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:15}}
* '''[[Luke 12:15 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:15]]''' [[2036|εἶπε]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[4314|πρὸς]] [[846|αὐτούς]], [[3708|Ὁρᾶτε]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[5442|φυλάσσεσθε]] [[575|ἀπὸ]] [[3588|τῆς]] [[4124|πλεονεξίας]]· [[3754|ὅτι]] [[3756|οὐκ]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[3588|τῷ]] [[4052|περισσεύειν]] [[5100|τινὶ]] [[3588|ἡ]] [[2222|ζωὴ]] [[846|αὐτοῦ]] [[2076|ἐστὶν]] [[1537|ἐκ]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[5224|ὑπαρχόντων]] [[846|αὐτοῦ]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:15''' And he said unto them, Take heed, and beware of covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:15 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:15]]''' And He said to them, “Take heed and beware of covetousness, because, one’s life does not consist in the abundance of the things he possesses.”

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:15 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:15 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And he seide to hem, Se ye, and be ye war of al coueytice; for the lijf of a man is not in the abundaunce of tho thingis, whiche he weldith. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] Wherfore he sayde vnto them: take hede and beware of covetousnes. For no mannes lyfe stondeth in the aboundaunce of the thinges which he possesseth. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] And he sayde vnto them: Take hede, and bewarre of couetousnesse, for no man lyueth therof, that he hath abundaunce of goodes. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] And he sayde vnto them: take hede, and be warre of couetousnes. For no mannes lyfe standeth in the aboundance of the thinges which he possesseth. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] Wherfore, he sayde vnto them: take hede, and beware of coueteousnes. For no mannes lyfe standeth in the abundaunce of the thynges whiche he possesseth. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And he sayde vnto them, Take heede & beware of couetousnes: For no mans lyfe standeth in the aboundaunce of the thynges which he possesseth. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Wherefore he said vnto them, Take heede, and beware of couetousnesse: for though a man haue abundance, yet his life standeth not in his riches. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And he said vnto them, Take heed and beware of couetousnes: for a mans life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] then he said to them, take care to be clear of all avarice: for the enjoyment of life does not depend upon the having large possessions. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and beware of all sort of covetousness; for life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which a man possesseth. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and beware of covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And He said unto them, See to it that ye beware of covetousness; for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of his possessions. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And he said to them, Take heed and beware of covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Then said he to them, Beware, and be on your guard against covetousness; for a man's life doth not depend on the abundance of his possessions. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And he said to them, Take heed, and beware of covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And he said to them, Be upon your guard against covetousness; for in whatever affluence a man be, his life depends not on his possessions. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And he said to his disciples, Beware of all avarice: for life is not in the abundance of riches. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And he said to them, See, and beware of all covetousness; for one's life depends not on the abundance of his property. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] He said and to them: See you and beware you of the covetousness; because not in the to abound any one the life of him is out of the possessions of him. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he said to them: Take heed, and beware of all covetousness; because a man's life consists not in the abundance of his possessions. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And he said to them, Take heed and beware of all covetousness; for even when one hath great abundance, his life doth not depend upon his possessions. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and beware of covetousness: for a man’s life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and keep yourselves from all covetousness: for a man’s life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] And he said to them, Take heed and keep yourselves from all covetousness, for [it is] not because a man is in abundance [that] his life is in his possessions. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] And he said unto them, `Observe, and beware of the covetousness, because not in the abundance of one's goods is his life.' ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and keep yourselves from all covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And he said unto them––Mind and be guarding yourselves from all covetousness; for not, in one’s abundance, doth his life spring out of his possessions. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And He said to them, See, and beware of all covetousness: because his life is not in that which aboundeth to any one, from those things belonging to him. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And He said to them, "Take heed, and guard yourselves from all covetousness; because one's life consists not in the abundance of the things which he possesses." (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And then he added: "Take care to keep yourselves free from every form of covetousness; for even in the height of his prosperity a man's true Life does not depend on what he has." (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] And to the people He said, "Take care, be on your guard against all covetousness, for no one's life consists in the superabundance of his possessions." (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] And he said to them: Take heed and beware of all covetousness, for no one has his life in the abundance of the things which he possesses. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> وقال لهم انظروا وتحفّظوا من الطمع. فانه متى كان لاحد كثير فليست حياته من امواله. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Guero erran cieçón, Ikussaçue, eta beguira çaitezte auaritiatic: ecen cembeitec onhassunez abundantia badu-ere, bere vicia eztu bere onetaric.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:15) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:15 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Et il leur dit: Voyez, et gardez-vous de toute avarice; car encore que quelqu'un soit riche, sa vie n'est pas dans ses biens. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Puis il leur dit : voyez, et gardez-vous d'avarice; car encore que les biens abondent à quelqu'un, il n'a pourtant pas la vie par ses biens. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Und er sprach zu ihnen: Sehet zu und hütet euch vor dem Geiz; denn niemand lebt davon, daß er viele Güter hat. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Poi disse loro: Badate, e guardatevi dall’avarizia; perciocchè, benchè alcuno abbondi, egli non ha però la vita per li suoi beni. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Badate e guardatevi da ogni avarizia; perché non è dall’abbondanza de’ beni che uno possiede, ch’egli ha la sua vita. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* dixitque ad illos videte et cavete ab omni avaritia quia non in abundantia cuiusquam vita eius est ex his quae possidet [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] При этом сказал им: смотрите, берегитесь любостяжания, ибо жизнь человека не зависит от изобилияего имения. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:15 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Basi, akawaambia wote, "Jihadharini na kila aina ya tamaa; maana uzima wa mtu hautegemei wingi wa vitu alivyo navyo."

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Därefter sade han till dem: »Sen till, att I tagen eder till vara för allt slags girighet; ty en människas liv beror icke därpå att hon har överflöd på ägodelar.» (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinabi niya sa kanila, Mangagmasid kayo, at kayo'y mangagingat sa lahat ng kasakiman: sapagka't ang buhay ng tao ay hindi sa kasaganaan ng mga bagay na tinatangkilik niya. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ðoạn, Ngài phán cùng chúng rằng: Hãy giữ cẩn thận chớ hà tiện gì hết; vì sự sống của người ta không phải cốt tại của cải mình dư dật đâu. (Lu-ca 12:15 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:15 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:15

2018-12-26T14:18:22Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:15}}
* '''[[Luke 12:15 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:15]]''' [[2036|εἶπε]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[4314|πρὸς]] [[846|αὐτούς]], [[3708|Ὁρᾶτε]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[5442|φυλάσσεσθε]] [[575|ἀπὸ]] [[3588|τῆς]] [[4124|πλεονεξίας]]· [[3754|ὅτι]] [[3756|οὐκ]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[3588|τῷ]] [[4052|περισσεύειν]] [[5100|τινὶ]] [[3588|ἡ]] [[2222|ζωὴ]] [[846|αὐτοῦ]] [[2076|ἐστὶν]] [[1537|ἐκ]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[5224|ὑπαρχόντων]] [[846|αὐτοῦ]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:15''' And he said unto them, Take heed, and beware of covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:15 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:15]]''' And He said to them, “Take heed and beware of covetousness, because, one’s life does not consist in the abundance of the things he possesses.”

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:15 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:15 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And he seide to hem, Se ye, and be ye war of al coueytice; for the lijf of a man is not in the abundaunce of tho thingis, whiche he weldith. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] Wherfore he sayde vnto them: take hede and beware of covetousnes. For no mannes lyfe stondeth in the aboundaunce of the thinges which he possesseth. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] And he sayde vnto them: Take hede, and bewarre of couetousnesse, for no man lyueth therof, that he hath abundaunce of goodes. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] And he sayde vnto them: take hede, and be warre of couetousnes. For no mannes lyfe standeth in the aboundance of the thinges which he possesseth. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] Wherfore, he sayde vnto them: take hede, and beware of coueteousnes. For no mannes lyfe standeth in the abundaunce of the thynges whiche he possesseth. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And he sayde vnto them, Take heede & beware of couetousnes: For no mans lyfe standeth in the aboundaunce of the thynges which he possesseth. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Wherefore he said vnto them, Take heede, and beware of couetousnesse: for though a man haue abundance, yet his life standeth not in his riches. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And he said vnto them, Take heed and beware of couetousnes: for a mans life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] then he said to them, take care to be clear of all avarice: for the enjoyment of life does not depend upon the having large possessions. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and beware of all sort of covetousness; for life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which a man possesseth. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and beware of covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And He said unto them, See to it that ye beware of covetousness; for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of his possessions. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And he said to them, Take heed and beware of covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Then said he to them, Beware, and be on your guard against covetousness; for a man's life doth not depend on the abundance of his possessions. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And he said to them, Take heed, and beware of covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And he said to them, Be upon your guard against covetousness; for in whatever affluence a man be, his life depends not on his possessions. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And he said to his disciples, Beware of all avarice: for life is not in the abundance of riches. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And he said to them, See, and beware of all covetousness; for one's life depends not on the abundance of his property. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] He said and to them: See you and beware you of the covetousness; because not in the to abound any one the life of him is out of the possessions of him. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he said to them: Take heed, and beware of all covetousness; because a man's life consists not in the abundance of his possessions. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And he said to them, Take heed and beware of all covetousness; for even when one hath great abundance, his life doth not depend upon his possessions. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and beware of covetousness: for a man’s life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and keep yourselves from all covetousness: for a man’s life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] And he said to them, Take heed and keep yourselves from all covetousness, for [it is] not because a man is in abundance [that] his life is in his possessions. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] And he said unto them, `Observe, and beware of the covetousness, because not in the abundance of one's goods is his life.' ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And he said unto them, Take heed, and keep yourselves from all covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And he said unto them––Mind and be guarding yourselves from all covetousness; for not, in one’s abundance, doth his life spring out of his possessions. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And He said to them, See, and beware of all covetousness: because his life is not in that which aboundeth to any one, from those things belonging to him. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And He said to them, "Take heed, and guard yourselves from all covetousness; because one's life consists not in the abundance of the things which he possesses." (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And then he added: "Take care to keep yourselves free from every form of covetousness; for even in the height of his prosperity a man's true Life does not depend on what he has." (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] And to the people He said, "Take care, be on your guard against all covetousness, for no one's life consists in the superabundance of his possessions." (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] And he said to them: Take heed and beware of all covetousness, for no one has his life in the abundance of the things which he possesses. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* وقال لهم انظروا وتحفّظوا من الطمع. فانه متى كان لاحد كثير فليست حياته من امواله. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Guero erran cieçón, Ikussaçue, eta beguira çaitezte auaritiatic: ecen cembeitec onhassunez abundantia badu-ere, bere vicia eztu bere onetaric.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 於是对众人说：你们要谨慎自守，免去一切的贪心，因为人的生命不在乎家道丰富。 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 於是對眾人說：你們要謹慎自守，免去一切的貪心，因為人的生命不在乎家道豐富。 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Et il leur dit: Voyez, et gardez-vous de toute avarice; car encore que quelqu'un soit riche, sa vie n'est pas dans ses biens. (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Puis il leur dit : voyez, et gardez-vous d'avarice; car encore que les biens abondent à quelqu'un, il n'a pourtant pas la vie par ses biens. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Und er sprach zu ihnen: Sehet zu und hütet euch vor dem Geiz; denn niemand lebt davon, daß er viele Güter hat. (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Poi disse loro: Badate, e guardatevi dall’avarizia; perciocchè, benchè alcuno abbondi, egli non ha però la vita per li suoi beni. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Badate e guardatevi da ogni avarizia; perché non è dall’abbondanza de’ beni che uno possiede, ch’egli ha la sua vita. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* dixitque ad illos videte et cavete ab omni avaritia quia non in abundantia cuiusquam vita eius est ex his quae possidet [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] При этом сказал им: смотрите, берегитесь любостяжания, ибо жизнь человека не зависит от изобилияего имения. [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Därefter sade han till dem: »Sen till, att I tagen eder till vara för allt slags girighet; ty en människas liv beror icke därpå att hon har överflöd på ägodelar.» (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinabi niya sa kanila, Mangagmasid kayo, at kayo'y mangagingat sa lahat ng kasakiman: sapagka't ang buhay ng tao ay hindi sa kasaganaan ng mga bagay na tinatangkilik niya. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ðoạn, Ngài phán cùng chúng rằng: Hãy giữ cẩn thận chớ hà tiện gì hết; vì sự sống của người ta không phải cốt tại của cải mình dư dật đâu. (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:15 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:14

2018-12-26T14:17:58Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:14}}
* '''[[Luke 12:14 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:14]]''' [[3588|ὁ]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[2036|εἶπεν]] [[846|αὐτῷ]], [[444|Ἄνθρωπε]], [[5101|τίς]] [[3165|με]] [[2525|κατέστησε]] [[1348|δικαστὴν]] [[2228|ἢ]] [[3312|μεριστὴν]] [[1909|ἐφ’]] [[5209|ὑμᾶς]];

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:14''' And he said unto him, Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you?

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:14 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:14]]''' But He said to him, “Man, who made Me a judge or an arbitrator over you?”

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:14 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:14 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And he seyde to hym, Man, who ordeynede me a domesman, or a departere, on you? ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] And he sayde vnto him: Man who made me a iudge or a devider over you? ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Neuertheles he sayde vnto him: Man, who hath set me to be a iudge or heretage parter ouer you? (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] And he sayde vnto him: Man, who made me a iudge or a deuider, ouer you? ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] And he sayde vnto hym: Man who made me a iudge or deuyder ouer you? ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And he sayde vnto hym: Man, who made me a iudge or a deuider ouer you? ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And he said vnto him, Man, who made me a iudge, or a deuider ouer you? ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And he said vnto him, Man, who made mee a iudge, or a diuider ouer you? ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] but Jesus answer'd him, who made me a judge, or an arbitrator between you? ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And he said unto him, Man, who made me a judge over you? (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And he said unto him, Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you? ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Man, who set me over you as a judge or divider? (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But he said to him, Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you? (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But he said to him, Man, who made me a judge and a divider among you? (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And he said to him, Man, who made me a judge, or a divider over you? (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] He answered, Man, who constituted me your judge or arbiter? (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But Jeshu said to him, Man, who established me over you a judge and a divider? ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And he said to him, Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you? (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] He and said to him: O man, who me appointed a judge or a divider over you? ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And he said to him: Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you? (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] But he said to him, Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you? (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And he said unto him, Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you? ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] But he said unto him, Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you? (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But he said to him, Man, who established me [as] a judge or a divider over you? (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] And he said to him, `Man, who set me a judge or a divider over you?' ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] But he said unto him, Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you? ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But, he, said unto him––Man! who hath appointed me a judge or divider over you? (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And He said to him; Man, who established me judge or a divider over you? (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But He said to him, "Man, who appointed Me a judge or a divider over you?" (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But Jesus said to him: "Man, who made me a judge or an arbiter between you?" (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "Man," He replied, "who has constituted me a judge or arbitrator over you?" (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But he said to him: Man, who appointed me a judge or a divider over you? (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* فقال له يا انسان من اقامني عليكما قاضيا او مقسّما. <big> </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Baina harc erran cieçón, Guiçoná, norc eçarri nau ni iuge, edo partitzale çuen gainean?

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:14) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:14 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Mais il lui dit: Homme, qui est-ce qui m'a etabli sur vous pour etre votre juge et pour faire vos partages? (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Mais il lui répondit : ô homme! qui est-ce qui m'a établi sur vous pour être votre juge, et pour faire vos partages? (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Er aber sprach zu ihm: Mensch, wer hat mich zum Richter oder Erbschichter über euch gesetzt? (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ma egli disse: O uomo, chi mi ha costituito sopra voi giudice, o partitore? (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Ma Gesù gli rispose: O uomo, chi mi ha costituito su voi giudice o spartitore? Poi disse loro: (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* at ille dixit ei homo quis me constituit iudicem aut divisorem super vos [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Он же сказал человеку тому: кто поставил Меня судить или делить вас? [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:14 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Yesu akamjibu, "Rafiki, ni nani aliyeniweka mimi mwamuzi au msuluhishi kati yenu?"

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men han svarade honom: »Min vän, vem har satt mig till domare eller skiftesman över eder?» (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Datapuwa't sinabi niya sa kaniya, Lalake, sino ang gumawa sa aking hukom o tagapamahagi sa inyo? (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Nhưng Ðức Chúa Jêsus đáp rằng: Hỡi người kia, ai đặt ta làm quan xử kiện hay là chia của cho các ngươi? (Lu-ca 12:14 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:14 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:14

2018-12-26T14:17:44Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

Luke 12:13

2018-12-26T14:17:00Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:13}}
* '''[[Luke 12:13 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:13]]''' [[2036|Εἶπε]] [[1161|δέ]] [[5100|τις]] [[846|αὐτῷ]] [[1537|ἐκ]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[3793|ὄχλου]], [[1320|Διδάσκαλε]], [[2036|εἰπὲ]] [[3588|τῷ]] [[80|ἀδελφῷ]] [[3450|μου]] [[3307|μερίσασθαι]] [[3326|μετ’]] [[1700|ἐμοῦ]] [[3588|τὴν]] [[2817|κληρονομίαν]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:13''' And one of the company said unto him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:13 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:13]]''' Then one from the company said to Him, “Teacher, tell my brother to divide the inheritance with me.”

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:13 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:13 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And oon of the puple seide to hym, Maystir, seie to my brothir, that he departe with me the eritage. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] One of the company sayde vnto hym: Master byd my brother devide the enheritauce with me. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But one of the people sayde vnto him: Master, byd my brother deuyde the enheritaunce with me. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] One of the company sayde vnto him: Master, speake to my brother, that he deuide the enheritaunce with me. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] One of the companye sayde vnto hym: Mayster byd my brother deuyde the enherytaunce with me. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] One of the companie sayde vnto hym: Maister, speake to my brother, that he deuide the inheritauce with me. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And one of the companie said vnto him, Master, bidde my brother deuide the inheritance with me. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And one of the company saide vnto him, Master, speake to my brother, that he diuide the inheritance with me. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] Then one of the company said to him, order my brother to give me my share of our inheritance. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And one of the company said unto him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And one of the company said unto him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And one among the multitude said to Him, Master, speak to my brother to divide the inheritance with me: but He said unto him, (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And one of the multitude said to him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Then spake one of the multitude to him, Master, order my brother to divide the inheritance with me. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And one of the company said to him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Then one said to him out of the crowd, Rabbi, order my brother to divide the inheritance with me. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] AND a man from the assembly said to him, Malphona, tell my brother to divide with me the inheritance. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And one of the multitude said to him, Teacher, tell my brother to divide with me the inheritance. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Said and one to him out of the crowd: O teacher, speak to the brother of me to divide with me the inheritance. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And a certain one of the multitude said to him: Teacher, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And one from the multitude said to him, Teacher, bid my brother divide the inheritance with me. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And one of the company said unto him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And one out of the multitude said unto him, Master, bid my brother divide the inheritance with me. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] And a person said to him out of the crowd, Teacher, speak to my brother to divide the inheritance with me. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] And a certain one said to him, out of the multitude, `Teacher, say to my brother to divide with me the inheritance.' ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And one out of the multitude said unto him, Teacher, bid my brother divide the inheritance with me. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And one from amongst the multitude said unto him––Teacher! bid my brother divide with me the inheritance. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And a certain one from the multitude said to Him, Teacher, speak to my brother, to divide the inheritance with me. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And one out of the multitude said to Him, "Teacher, bid my brother divide the inheritance with me." (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] "Teacher," a man in the crowd said to Jesus, "tell my brother to share the property with me." (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Just then a man in the crowd appealed to Him. "Rabbi," he said, "tell my brother to give me a share of the inheritance." (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But someone from the multitude said to him: Teacher, speak to my brother that he divide with me the inheritance. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> وقال له واحد من الجمع يا معلّم قل لاخي ان يقاسمني الميراث. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]]

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:13) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:13 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Et quelqu'un lui dit du milieu de la foule: Maitre, dis à mon frere de partager avec moi l'heritage. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et quelqu'un de la troupe lui dit : Maître, dis à mon frère qu'il partage avec moi l'héritage. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Es sprach aber einer aus dem Volk zu ihm: Meister, sage meinem Bruder, daß er mit mir das Erbe teile. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] OR alcuno della moltitudine gli disse: Maestro, di’ a mio fratello che partisca meco l’eredità. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Or uno della folla gli disse: Maestro, di’ a mio fratello che divida con me l’eredità. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* ait autem quidam ei de turba magister dic fratri meo ut dividat mecum hereditatem [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Некто из народа сказал Ему: Учитель! скажи брату моему, чтобы он разделил со мною наследство. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:13 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Mtu mmoja katika ule umati wa watu akamwambia, "Mwalimu, mwambie ndugu yangu tugawane urithi aliotuachia baba."

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Och en man i folkhopen sade till honom: »Mästare, säg till min broder att han skiftar arvet med mig.» (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinabi sa kaniya ng isa sa karamihan, Guro, iutos mo sa aking kapatid na bahaginan ako ng mana. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Bấy giờ, một người giữa dân chúng thưa rằng: Thưa thầy, xin biểu anh tôi chia gia tài cho tôi. (Lu-ca 12:13 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:13 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:13

2018-12-26T14:16:46Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:13}}
* '''[[Luke 12:13 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:13]]''' [[2036|Εἶπε]] [[1161|δέ]] [[5100|τις]] [[846|αὐτῷ]] [[1537|ἐκ]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[3793|ὄχλου]], [[1320|Διδάσκαλε]], [[2036|εἰπὲ]] [[3588|τῷ]] [[80|ἀδελφῷ]] [[3450|μου]] [[3307|μερίσασθαι]] [[3326|μετ’]] [[1700|ἐμοῦ]] [[3588|τὴν]] [[2817|κληρονομίαν]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:13''' And one of the company said unto him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:13 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:13]]''' Then one from the company said to Him, “Teacher, tell my brother to divide the inheritance with me.”

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:13 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:13 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And oon of the puple seide to hym, Maystir, seie to my brothir, that he departe with me the eritage. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] One of the company sayde vnto hym: Master byd my brother devide the enheritauce with me. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But one of the people sayde vnto him: Master, byd my brother deuyde the enheritaunce with me. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] One of the company sayde vnto him: Master, speake to my brother, that he deuide the enheritaunce with me. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] One of the companye sayde vnto hym: Mayster byd my brother deuyde the enherytaunce with me. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] One of the companie sayde vnto hym: Maister, speake to my brother, that he deuide the inheritauce with me. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And one of the companie said vnto him, Master, bidde my brother deuide the inheritance with me. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And one of the company saide vnto him, Master, speake to my brother, that he diuide the inheritance with me. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] Then one of the company said to him, order my brother to give me my share of our inheritance. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And one of the company said unto him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And one of the company said unto him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And one among the multitude said to Him, Master, speak to my brother to divide the inheritance with me: but He said unto him, (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And one of the multitude said to him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Then spake one of the multitude to him, Master, order my brother to divide the inheritance with me. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And one of the company said to him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Then one said to him out of the crowd, Rabbi, order my brother to divide the inheritance with me. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] AND a man from the assembly said to him, Malphona, tell my brother to divide with me the inheritance. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And one of the multitude said to him, Teacher, tell my brother to divide with me the inheritance. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Said and one to him out of the crowd: O teacher, speak to the brother of me to divide with me the inheritance. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And a certain one of the multitude said to him: Teacher, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And one from the multitude said to him, Teacher, bid my brother divide the inheritance with me. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And one of the company said unto him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And one out of the multitude said unto him, Master, bid my brother divide the inheritance with me. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] And a person said to him out of the crowd, Teacher, speak to my brother to divide the inheritance with me. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] And a certain one said to him, out of the multitude, `Teacher, say to my brother to divide with me the inheritance.' ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And one out of the multitude said unto him, Teacher, bid my brother divide the inheritance with me. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And one from amongst the multitude said unto him––Teacher! bid my brother divide with me the inheritance. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And a certain one from the multitude said to Him, Teacher, speak to my brother, to divide the inheritance with me. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And one out of the multitude said to Him, "Teacher, bid my brother divide the inheritance with me." (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] "Teacher," a man in the crowd said to Jesus, "tell my brother to share the property with me." (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Just then a man in the crowd appealed to Him. "Rabbi," he said, "tell my brother to give me a share of the inheritance." (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But someone from the multitude said to him: Teacher, speak to my brother that he divide with me the inheritance. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* وقال له واحد من الجمع يا معلّم قل لاخي ان يقاسمني الميراث. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Eta erran cieçón gendetzecoetaric batec, Magistruá, erróc ene anayeri parti deçan enequin heretagea.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 众人中有一个人对耶稣说：夫子！请你吩咐我的兄长和我分开家业。 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 眾人中有一個人對耶穌說：夫子！請你吩咐我的兄長和我分開家業。 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Et quelqu'un lui dit du milieu de la foule: Maitre, dis à mon frere de partager avec moi l'heritage. (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et quelqu'un de la troupe lui dit : Maître, dis à mon frère qu'il partage avec moi l'héritage. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Es sprach aber einer aus dem Volk zu ihm: Meister, sage meinem Bruder, daß er mit mir das Erbe teile. (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] OR alcuno della moltitudine gli disse: Maestro, di’ a mio fratello che partisca meco l’eredità. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Or uno della folla gli disse: Maestro, di’ a mio fratello che divida con me l’eredità. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* ait autem quidam ei de turba magister dic fratri meo ut dividat mecum hereditatem [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] Некто из народа сказал Ему: Учитель! скажи брату моему, чтобы он разделил со мною наследство. [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Och en man i folkhopen sade till honom: »Mästare, säg till min broder att han skiftar arvet med mig.» (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinabi sa kaniya ng isa sa karamihan, Guro, iutos mo sa aking kapatid na bahaginan ako ng mana. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Bấy giờ, một người giữa dân chúng thưa rằng: Thưa thầy, xin biểu anh tôi chia gia tài cho tôi. (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:13 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:12

2018-12-05T02:11:25Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:12}}
* '''[[Luke 12:12 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:12]]''' [[3588|τὸ]] [[1063|γὰρ]] [[40|Ἅγιον]] [[4151|Πνεῦμα]] [[1321|διδάξει]] [[5209|ὑμᾶς]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[846|αὐτῇ]] [[3588|τῇ]] [[5610|ὥρᾳ]], [[3739|ἃ]] [[1163|δεῖ]] [[2036|εἰπεῖν]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:12''' For the Holy Ghost shall teach you in the same hour what ye ought to say.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:12 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:12]]''' Because, the Holy Spirit will teach you in that very hour what you ought to say.”

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}
==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:12 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:12 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] For the Hooli Goost schal teche you in that our, what it bihoueth you to seie. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] For the holy goost shall teache you in the same houre what ye ought to saye. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] for the holy goost shal teach you in the same houre, what ye ought to saye. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] For the holy goost shall teache you in the same houre, what ye ought to saye. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] For the holye ghost shal teache you in the same houre, what ye ought to saye. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] For the holy ghost shall teache you in the same houre what ye ought to say. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] For the holy Ghost shall teache you in the same houre, what yee ought to say. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] For the holy Ghost shal teach you in the same houre, what ye ought to say. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] for the holy spirit shall instruct you on the very occasion, what is proper to be said. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] for the Holy Ghost shall teach you in the same hour what ye ought to say, (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] For the Holy Ghost shall teach you in the same hour what ye ought to say. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] for the holy Spirit shall teach you at that very time what ye ought to say. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] take no thought how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say. For the Holy Ghost shall teach you in that hour what ye ought to say. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] for the Holy Ghost will teach you at that very hour what ye ought to say. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] For the Holy Spirit will teach you in the same hour what ye ought to say. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] for the Holy Spirit will teach you in that moment, what ought to be said. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] for the Spirit of Holiness will teach you in that hour what you ought to say. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] for the Holy Spirit shall teach you in that hour what you ought to say. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] the for holy spirit will teach you in this the hour, what it is proper to say. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] For the Holy Spirit will teach you in that very hour what ye ought to say. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] for the Holy Spirit will teach you in that very hour what ye ought to say. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] for the Holy Ghost shall teach you in the same hour what ye ought to say. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] for the Holy Spirit shall teach you in that very hour what ye ought to say. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] for the Holy Spirit shall teach you in the hour itself what should be said. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] for the Holy Spirit shall teach you in that hour what it behoveth `you' to say.' ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] for the Holy Spirit shall teach you in that very hour what ye ought to say. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] For, the Holy Spirit, shall teach you, in that very hour, what ye ought to say. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] for the Holy Spirit will teach you in that hour the things which it behooveth you to speak. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] for the Holy Spirit will teach you in that very hour what ye ought to say." (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] for the Holy Spirit will show you at the moment what you ought to say." (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] for the Holy Spirit shall teach you at that very moment what you must say." (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] for the Holy Spirit shall teach you in the same hour what things you ought to say. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> لان الروح القدس يعلّمكم في تلك الساعة ما يجب ان تقولوه </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Ecen Spiritu sainduac iracatsiren çaituzte ordu hartan berean, cer erran behar daten.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:12) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:12 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* car le Saint Esprit vous enseignera à l'heure meme ce qu'il faudra dire. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Car le Saint-Esprit vous enseignera dans ce même instant ce qu'il faudra dire. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] denn der heilige Geist wird euch zu derselben Stunde lehren, was ihr sagen sollt. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Perciocchè lo Spirito Santo, in quell’ora stessa, v’insegnerà ciò che vi converrà dire. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] perché lo Spirito Santo v’insegnerà in quell’ora stessa quel che dovrete dire. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* Spiritus enim Sanctus docebit vos in ipsa hora quae oporteat dicere [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] ибо Святый Дух научит вас в тот час, что должно говорить. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:12 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Kwa maana wakati huo Roho Mtakatifu atawafundisheni kile mnachopaswa kusema."

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] ty den helige Ande skall i samma stund lära eder vad I skolen säga.» (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Sapagka't ituturo sa inyo ng Espiritu Santo sa oras ding yaon ang inyong dapat sabihin. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] bởi vì chính giờ đó Ðức Thánh Linh sẽ dạy các ngươi những lời phải nói. (Lu-ca 12:12 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:12 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:12

2018-12-05T01:40:02Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

Luke 12:11

2018-12-04T17:41:22Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:11}}
* '''[[Luke 12:11 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:11]]''' [[3752|ὅταν]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[4374|προσφέρωσιν]] [[5209|ὑμᾶς]] [[1909|ἐπὶ]] [[3588|τὰς]] [[4864|συναγωγὰς]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|τὰς]] [[746|ἀρχὰς]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|τὰς]] [[1849|ἐξουσίας]], [[3361|μὴ]] [[3309|μεριμνᾶτε]] [[4459|πῶς]] [[2228|ἢ]] [[5101|τί]] [[626|ἀπολογήσησθε]], [[2228|ἢ]] [[5101|τί]] [[2036|εἴπητε]]·

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:11''' And when they bring you unto the synagogues, and unto magistrates, and powers, take ye no thought how or what thing ye shall answer, or what ye shall say:

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:11 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:11]]''' “Now when they bring you to the synagogues and to magistrates and authorities, do not worry about how or what you should answer, or what you should say.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:11 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:11 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And whanne thei leden you in to synagogis, and to magistratis, and potestatis, nyle ye `be bisie, hou or what ye schulen answere, or what ye schulen seie. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] When they bringe you vnto the synagoges and vnto the rulers and officers take no thought how or what thinge ye shall answer or what ye shall speake. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Whan they brynge you in to their synagoges, and to the rulers & officers, take ye no thought, how or what ye shal answere, or what ye shal speake: (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] When they bringe you vnto the sinagoges, and vnto the rulers and officers, take ye no thought, how or what thinge ye shall answer, or what ye shall speake. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] When they brynge you vnto the synagoges and vnto the rulers and offycers take no thoughte, how or what thynge ye shall aunswere or what ye shall speake. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And when they bryng you vnto the synagogues, and vnto the rulers and officers, take ye no thought, how or what thyng ye shall aunswere, or what ye shall speake. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And when they shal bring you vnto the Synagogues, and vnto the rulers and Princes, take no thought howe, or what thing ye shall answere, or what yee shall speake. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And when they bring you vnto the Synagogues, and vnto Magistrates, & powers, take yee no thought how or what thing ye shall answere, or what ye shall say: ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] when you are brought into the synagogues, and before magistrates and rulers, be not sollicitous what to say in your own defence; ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And when they bring you unto the synagogues, and magistrates, and powers, be not sollicitous before hand how ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And when they bring you unto the synagogues, and unto magistrates, and powers, take ye no thought how or what thing ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And when they bring you before the synagogues, and magistrates, and powers, be not solicitous how or what defence to make, or what to say: (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But when they bring you to the synagogues and to magistrates and powers, (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And when they shall bring you before the synagogues, and magistrates, and the ruling powers, be under no anxiety how or what defence ye shall make, or what ye shall say: (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And when they bring you to the synagogues, and before magistrates, and powers, be not solicitous how or what thing ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And when you are brought before synagogues, and magistrates, and rulers; be not solicitous how or what you shall answer, or what you shall say: (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And when they bring you into the synagogues, before heads and authorities, be not anxious how you shall express yourselves, or what you shall say; ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And when they bring you to the synagogues, and powers, and authorities, be not anxious how you shall defend yourselves, or what you shall say; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] When and they may bring you to the synagogues and the rulers and the authorities, not be you anxious, how or what you may answer, or what you may say; ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And when they bring you to the synagogues, and magistrates, and authorities, take not thought how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And when they bring you to the synagogues and the magistrates and the authorities, be not anxious as to how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say; (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And when they bring you unto the synagogues, and unto magistrates, and powers, take ye no thought how or what thing ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And when they bring you before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, be not anxious how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But when they bring you before the synagogues and rulers and the authorities, be not careful how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `And when they bring you before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, be not anxious how or what ye may reply, or what ye may say, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And when they bring you before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, be not anxious how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But, whensoever they shall be bringing you in before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, do not be anxious how, [or what] ye shall answer, or what ye shall say; (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But when they may carry you into the synagogues, and tribunals, and authorities; do not be solicitous as to what you may apologize, or what you may say: (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And, when they bring you in before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, be not anxious how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say; (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Whenever they take you before the Synagogue Courts or the magistrates or other authorities, do not be anxious as to how you will defend yourselves, or what your defence will be, or what you will say; (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] And when they are bringing you before synagogues and magistrates and governors, do not anxiously ponder the manner or matter of your defence, nor what you are to say; (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But when they bring you before synagogues, and rulers, and authorities, be not anxious how or what you shall answer in defense or what you shall say; (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> ومتى قدموكم الى المجامع والرؤساء والسلاطين فلا تهتموا كيف او بما تحتجّون او بما تقولون. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eta eramanen çaituztenean synagoguetara, eta magistratuetara, eta potestatetara, eztuçuela ansiaric, nola edo cer ihardetsiren duçuen edo cer erranen.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:11) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:11 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Et quand ils vous meneront devant les synagogues et les magistrats et les autorites, ne soyez pas en souci comment, ou quelle chose vous repondrez, ou de ce que vous direz; (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et quand ils vous mèneront aux Synagogues, et aux Magistrats, et aux Puissances, ne soyez point en peine comment, ou quelle chose vous répondrez, ou de ce que vous aurez à dire. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Wenn sie euch aber führen werden in ihre Schulen und vor die Obrigkeit und vor die Gewaltigen, so sorget nicht, wie oder was ihr antworten oder was ihr sagen sollt; (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ora, quando vi avranno condotti davanti alle raunanze, e a’ magistrati, ed alle podestà, non istate in sollecitudine come, o che avrete a rispondere a vostra difesa, o che avrete a dire. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Quando poi vi condurranno davanti alle sinagoghe e ai magistrati e alle autorità, non state in ansietà del come o del che avrete a rispondere a vostra difesa, o di quel che avrete a dire; (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* cum autem inducent vos in synagogas et ad magistratus et potestates nolite solliciti esse qualiter aut quid respondeatis aut quid dicatis [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Когда же приведут вас в синагоги, к начальствам ивластям, не заботьтесь, как или что отвечать, или что говорить, [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:11 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Watakapowapeleka ninyi mbele ya masunagogi na mbele ya wakuu na watawala msiwe na wasiwasi juu ya jinsi mtakavyojitetea au jinsi mtakavyosema.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men när man drager eder fram inför synagogor och överheter och myndigheter, så gören eder icke bekymmer för huru eller varmed I skolen försvara eder, eller vad I skolen säga; (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At pagka kayo'y dadalhin sa harap ng mga sinagoga, at sa mga pinuno, at sa mga may kapamahalaan, ay huwag kayong mangabalisa kung paano o ano ang inyong isasagot, o kung ano ang inyong sasabihin: (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Khi người ta đem các ngươi đến nhà hội, trước mặt quan án và quan cai trị, thì chớ lo về nói cách nào để binh vực mình, hoặc nói lời gì; (Lu-ca 12:11 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:11 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:11

2018-12-04T17:41:12Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:11}}
* '''[[Luke 12:11 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:11]]''' [[3752|ὅταν]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[4374|προσφέρωσιν]] [[5209|ὑμᾶς]] [[1909|ἐπὶ]] [[3588|τὰς]] [[4864|συναγωγὰς]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|τὰς]] [[746|ἀρχὰς]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|τὰς]] [[1849|ἐξουσίας]], [[3361|μὴ]] [[3309|μεριμνᾶτε]] [[4459|πῶς]] [[2228|ἢ]] [[5101|τί]] [[626|ἀπολογήσησθε]], [[2228|ἢ]] [[5101|τί]] [[2036|εἴπητε]]·

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:11''' And when they bring you unto the synagogues, and unto magistrates, and powers, take ye no thought how or what thing ye shall answer, or what ye shall say:

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:11 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:11]]''' “Now when they bring you to the synagogues and to magistrates and authorities, do not worry about how or what you should answer, or what you should say.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:11 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:11 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And whanne thei leden you in to synagogis, and to magistratis, and potestatis, nyle ye `be bisie, hou or what ye schulen answere, or what ye schulen seie. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] When they bringe you vnto the synagoges and vnto the rulers and officers take no thought how or what thinge ye shall answer or what ye shall speake. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Whan they brynge you in to their synagoges, and to the rulers & officers, take ye no thought, how or what ye shal answere, or what ye shal speake: (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] When they bringe you vnto the sinagoges, and vnto the rulers and officers, take ye no thought, how or what thinge ye shall answer, or what ye shall speake. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] When they brynge you vnto the synagoges and vnto the rulers and offycers take no thoughte, how or what thynge ye shall aunswere or what ye shall speake. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And when they bryng you vnto the synagogues, and vnto the rulers and officers, take ye no thought, how or what thyng ye shall aunswere, or what ye shall speake. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And when they shal bring you vnto the Synagogues, and vnto the rulers and Princes, take no thought howe, or what thing ye shall answere, or what yee shall speake. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And when they bring you vnto the Synagogues, and vnto Magistrates, & powers, take yee no thought how or what thing ye shall answere, or what ye shall say: ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] when you are brought into the synagogues, and before magistrates and rulers, be not sollicitous what to say in your own defence; ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And when they bring you unto the synagogues, and magistrates, and powers, be not sollicitous before hand how ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And when they bring you unto the synagogues, and unto magistrates, and powers, take ye no thought how or what thing ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And when they bring you before the synagogues, and magistrates, and powers, be not solicitous how or what defence to make, or what to say: (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But when they bring you to the synagogues and to magistrates and powers, (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And when they shall bring you before the synagogues, and magistrates, and the ruling powers, be under no anxiety how or what defence ye shall make, or what ye shall say: (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And when they bring you to the synagogues, and before magistrates, and powers, be not solicitous how or what thing ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And when you are brought before synagogues, and magistrates, and rulers; be not solicitous how or what you shall answer, or what you shall say: (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And when they bring you into the synagogues, before heads and authorities, be not anxious how you shall express yourselves, or what you shall say; ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And when they bring you to the synagogues, and powers, and authorities, be not anxious how you shall defend yourselves, or what you shall say; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] When and they may bring you to the synagogues and the rulers and the authorities, not be you anxious, how or what you may answer, or what you may say; ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And when they bring you to the synagogues, and magistrates, and authorities, take not thought how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And when they bring you to the synagogues and the magistrates and the authorities, be not anxious as to how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say; (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And when they bring you unto the synagogues, and unto magistrates, and powers, take ye no thought how or what thing ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And when they bring you before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, be not anxious how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But when they bring you before the synagogues and rulers and the authorities, be not careful how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `And when they bring you before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, be not anxious how or what ye may reply, or what ye may say, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And when they bring you before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, be not anxious how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say: ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But, whensoever they shall be bringing you in before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, do not be anxious how, [or what] ye shall answer, or what ye shall say; (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But when they may carry you into the synagogues, and tribunals, and authorities; do not be solicitous as to what you may apologize, or what you may say: (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And, when they bring you in before the synagogues, and the rulers, and the authorities, be not anxious how or what ye shall answer, or what ye shall say; (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Whenever they take you before the Synagogue Courts or the magistrates or other authorities, do not be anxious as to how you will defend yourselves, or what your defence will be, or what you will say; (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] And when they are bringing you before synagogues and magistrates and governors, do not anxiously ponder the manner or matter of your defence, nor what you are to say; (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But when they bring you before synagogues, and rulers, and authorities, be not anxious how or what you shall answer in defense or what you shall say; (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* ومتى قدموكم الى المجامع والرؤساء والسلاطين فلا تهتموا كيف او بما تحتجّون او بما تقولون. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Eta eramanen çaituztenean synagoguetara, eta magistratuetara, eta potestatetara, eztuçuela ansiaric, nola edo cer ihardetsiren duçuen edo cer erranen.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 人带你们到会堂，并官府和有权柄的人面前，不要思虑怎麽分诉，说甚麽话； (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 人帶你們到會堂，並官府和有權柄的人面前，不要思慮怎麼分訴，說甚麼話； (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Et quand ils vous meneront devant les synagogues et les magistrats et les autorites, ne soyez pas en souci comment, ou quelle chose vous repondrez, ou de ce que vous direz; (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et quand ils vous mèneront aux Synagogues, et aux Magistrats, et aux Puissances, ne soyez point en peine comment, ou quelle chose vous répondrez, ou de ce que vous aurez à dire. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Wenn sie euch aber führen werden in ihre Schulen und vor die Obrigkeit und vor die Gewaltigen, so sorget nicht, wie oder was ihr antworten oder was ihr sagen sollt; (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ora, quando vi avranno condotti davanti alle raunanze, e a’ magistrati, ed alle podestà, non istate in sollecitudine come, o che avrete a rispondere a vostra difesa, o che avrete a dire. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Quando poi vi condurranno davanti alle sinagoghe e ai magistrati e alle autorità, non state in ansietà del come o del che avrete a rispondere a vostra difesa, o di quel che avrete a dire; (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* cum autem inducent vos in synagogas et ad magistratus et potestates nolite solliciti esse qualiter aut quid respondeatis aut quid dicatis [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] Когда же приведут вас в синагоги, к начальствам ивластям, не заботьтесь, как или что отвечать, или что говорить, [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men när man drager eder fram inför synagogor och överheter och myndigheter, så gören eder icke bekymmer för huru eller varmed I skolen försvara eder, eller vad I skolen säga; (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] At pagka kayo'y dadalhin sa harap ng mga sinagoga, at sa mga pinuno, at sa mga may kapamahalaan, ay huwag kayong mangabalisa kung paano o ano ang inyong isasagot, o kung ano ang inyong sasabihin: (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Khi người ta đem các ngươi đến nhà hội, trước mặt quan án và quan cai trị, thì chớ lo về nói cách nào để binh vực mình, hoặc nói lời gì; (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:11 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:10

2018-12-04T17:40:39Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:10}}
* '''[[Luke 12:10 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:10]]''' [[2532|καὶ]] [[3956|πᾶς]] [[3739|ὃς]] [[2046|ἐρεῖ]] [[3056|λόγον]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[3588|τὸν]] [[5207|υἱὸν]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[444|ἀνθρώπου]], [[863|ἀφεθήσεται]] [[846|αὐτῷ]]· [[3588|τῷ]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[3588|τὸ]] [[40|Ἅγιον]] [[4151|Πνεῦμα]] [[987|βλασφημήσαντι]] [[3756|οὐκ]] [[863|ἀφεθήσεται]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:10''' And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Ghost it shall not be forgiven.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:10 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:10]]''' “And anyone who speaks a word against the Son of Man, it will be forgiven him; but to him who blasphemes against the Holy Spirit, it will not be forgiven.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:10 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:10 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And ech that seith a word ayens mannus sone, it schal be foryouun to hym; but it schal not be foryouun to hym, that blasfemeth ayens the Hooli Goost. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] And whosoever speaketh a worde agaynst ye sonne of ma it shalbe forgeven him. But vnto him yt blasphemeth the holy goost it shall not be forgeven. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] And who so euer speaketh a worde agaynst the sonne of man, it shalbe forgeuen him: But who so blasphemeth the holy goost, it shal not be forgeuen him. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] And whosoeuer speaketh a worde agaynst þe sonne of man, it shalbe forgeuen him. But vnto him þt blasphemeth the holy goost, it shall not be forgeuen. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] And whosoeuer speaketh a worde agaynste the sonne of man it shall be forgeuen hym. But vnto hym, that blasphemeth the holy ghost, it shall not be forgeuen. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And whosoeuer speaketh a worde agaynst the sonne of man, it shalbe forgeuen hym: But vnto hym that blasphemeth the holy ghost, it shall not be forgeuen. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And whosoeuer shall speake a woorde against the Sonne of man, it shall be forgiuen him: but vnto him, that shal blaspheme ye holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiuen. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And whosoeuer shall speake a word against the Sonne of man, it shall be forgiuen him: but vnto him that blasphemeth against the holy Ghost, it shal not be forgiuen. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] and whoever shall cast a reflection upon the son of man, it shall be forgiven him; but as for him, that shall blaspheme the holy spirit, it shall not be forgiven. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but against the Holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiven him, neither in this age, nor in that to come, (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Ghost it shall not be forgiven. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it may be forgiven him; but unto him, that blasphemeth the holy Spirit, it shall not be forgiven. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And whosoever shall speak against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but to him who blasphemeth against the Holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiven. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And every one who shall utter a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him; but for him who hath blasphemed against the Holy Ghost, there shall be no forgiveness. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And whoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but to him that blasphemeth against the Holy Spirit, it shall not be forgiven. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And whosoever shall inveigh against the Son of Man, may obtain remission; but to him who detracts from the Holy Spirit, there is no remission. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And every one who shall speak a word against the Son of man, it may be forgiven him; but whoever against the Spirit of Holiness shall blaspheme, it shall not be forgiven him. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And every one that speaks a word against the Son of man shall have forgiveness; but he that blasphemes against the Holy Spirit shall not be forgiven. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And all who shall speak a word against the son of the man, it will be forgiven to him; to the but against the holy spirit having spoken evil not will be forgiven. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And every one that shall speak a word against the Son of man, it will be forgiven him; but to him that blasphemes against the Holy Spirit, it shall not be forgiven. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And every one that shall speak a word against the Son of man, it will be forgiven him; but to him that hath blasphemed against the Holy Spirit, it will not be forgiven. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Ghost it shall not be forgiven. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And every one who shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Spirit it shall not be forgiven. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] and whoever shall say a word against the Son of man it shall be forgiven him; but to him that speaks injuriously against the Holy Spirit it shall not be forgiven. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and every one whoever shall say a word to the Son of Man, it shall be forgiven to him, but to him who to the Holy Spirit did speak evil, it shall not be forgiven. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And every one who shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Spirit it shall not be forgiven. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And, whosoever shall say a word against the Son of Man, it shall be forgiven him; but, unto him who, against the Holy Spirit, speaketh profanely, it shall not be forgiven. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And every one who shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but to him having blasphemed against the Holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiven. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And every one who shall say a word against the Son of Man, it shall be forgiven him; but to him who blasphemes against the Holy Spirit, it shall not be forgiven. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Every one who shall say anything against the Son of Man will be forgiven, but for him who slanders the Holy Spirit there will be no forgiveness. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "Moreover every one who shall speak against the Son of Man, may obtain forgiveness; but he who blasphemes the Holy Spirit will never obtain forgiveness. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] And every one that shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him; but to him that blasphemes against the Holy Spirit it shall not be forgiven. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> وكل من قال كلمة على ابن الانسان يغفر له. واما من جدف على الروح القدس فلا يغفر له. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eta norc-ere erranen baitu hitzic guiçonaren Semearen contra barkaturen çayó hari: baina Spiritu sainduaren contra blasphematuren duenari, etzayó barkaturen.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:10) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:10 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Et quiconque parlera contre le fils de l'homme, il lui sera pardonne; mais à celui qui aura profere des paroles injurieuses contre le Saint Esprit, il ne sera pas pardonne. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et quiconque parlera contre le Fils de l'homme, il lui sera pardonné; mais à celui qui aura blasphémé contre le Saint-Esprit, il ne lui sera point pardonné. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Und wer da redet ein Wort wider des Menschen Sohn, dem soll es vergeben werden; wer aber lästert den heiligen Geist, dem soll es nicht vergeben werden. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ed a chiunque avrà detta alcuna parola contro al Figliuol dell’uomo sarà perdonato; ma, a chi avrà bestemmiato contro allo Spirito Santo non sarà perdonato. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Ed a chiunque avrà parlato contro il Figliuol dell’uomo, sarà perdonato; ma a chi avrà bestemmiato contro lo Spirito Santo, non sarà perdonato. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* et omnis qui dicit verbum in Filium hominis remittetur illi ei autem qui in Spiritum Sanctum blasphemaverit non remittetur [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] И всякому, кто скажет слово на Сына Человеческого,прощено будет; а кто скажет хулу на Святаго Духа, тому не простится. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:10 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Yeyote anayesema neno la kumpinga Mwana wa Mtu atasamehewa; lakini anayemkufuru Roho Mtakatifu hatasamehewa.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Och om någon säger något mot Människosonen, så skall det bliva honom förlåtet; men den som hädar den helige Ande, honom skall det icke bliva förlåtet. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Ang bawa't magsalita ng salitang laban sa Anak ng tao ay patatawarin: nguni't ang magsalita ng kapusungan laban sa Espiritu Santo ay hindi patatawarin. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ai nói nghịch cùng Con người, thì sẽ được tha; song kẻ nói lộng ngôn đến Ðức Thánh Linh, thì không được tha đâu. (Lu-ca 12:10 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:10 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:10

2018-12-04T17:40:31Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:10}}
* '''[[Luke 12:10 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:10]]''' [[2532|καὶ]] [[3956|πᾶς]] [[3739|ὃς]] [[2046|ἐρεῖ]] [[3056|λόγον]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[3588|τὸν]] [[5207|υἱὸν]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[444|ἀνθρώπου]], [[863|ἀφεθήσεται]] [[846|αὐτῷ]]· [[3588|τῷ]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[3588|τὸ]] [[40|Ἅγιον]] [[4151|Πνεῦμα]] [[987|βλασφημήσαντι]] [[3756|οὐκ]] [[863|ἀφεθήσεται]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:10''' And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Ghost it shall not be forgiven.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:10 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:10]]''' “And anyone who speaks a word against the Son of Man, it will be forgiven him; but to him who blasphemes against the Holy Spirit, it will not be forgiven.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:10 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:10 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And ech that seith a word ayens mannus sone, it schal be foryouun to hym; but it schal not be foryouun to hym, that blasfemeth ayens the Hooli Goost. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] And whosoever speaketh a worde agaynst ye sonne of ma it shalbe forgeven him. But vnto him yt blasphemeth the holy goost it shall not be forgeven. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] And who so euer speaketh a worde agaynst the sonne of man, it shalbe forgeuen him: But who so blasphemeth the holy goost, it shal not be forgeuen him. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] And whosoeuer speaketh a worde agaynst þe sonne of man, it shalbe forgeuen him. But vnto him þt blasphemeth the holy goost, it shall not be forgeuen. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] And whosoeuer speaketh a worde agaynste the sonne of man it shall be forgeuen hym. But vnto hym, that blasphemeth the holy ghost, it shall not be forgeuen. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And whosoeuer speaketh a worde agaynst the sonne of man, it shalbe forgeuen hym: But vnto hym that blasphemeth the holy ghost, it shall not be forgeuen. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And whosoeuer shall speake a woorde against the Sonne of man, it shall be forgiuen him: but vnto him, that shal blaspheme ye holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiuen. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And whosoeuer shall speake a word against the Sonne of man, it shall be forgiuen him: but vnto him that blasphemeth against the holy Ghost, it shal not be forgiuen. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] and whoever shall cast a reflection upon the son of man, it shall be forgiven him; but as for him, that shall blaspheme the holy spirit, it shall not be forgiven. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but against the Holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiven him, neither in this age, nor in that to come, (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Ghost it shall not be forgiven. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it may be forgiven him; but unto him, that blasphemeth the holy Spirit, it shall not be forgiven. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] And whosoever shall speak against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but to him who blasphemeth against the Holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiven. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] And every one who shall utter a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him; but for him who hath blasphemed against the Holy Ghost, there shall be no forgiveness. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And whoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but to him that blasphemeth against the Holy Spirit, it shall not be forgiven. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] And whosoever shall inveigh against the Son of Man, may obtain remission; but to him who detracts from the Holy Spirit, there is no remission. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] And every one who shall speak a word against the Son of man, it may be forgiven him; but whoever against the Spirit of Holiness shall blaspheme, it shall not be forgiven him. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And every one that speaks a word against the Son of man shall have forgiveness; but he that blasphemes against the Holy Spirit shall not be forgiven. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And all who shall speak a word against the son of the man, it will be forgiven to him; to the but against the holy spirit having spoken evil not will be forgiven. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And every one that shall speak a word against the Son of man, it will be forgiven him; but to him that blasphemes against the Holy Spirit, it shall not be forgiven. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And every one that shall speak a word against the Son of man, it will be forgiven him; but to him that hath blasphemed against the Holy Spirit, it will not be forgiven. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Ghost it shall not be forgiven. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And every one who shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Spirit it shall not be forgiven. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] and whoever shall say a word against the Son of man it shall be forgiven him; but to him that speaks injuriously against the Holy Spirit it shall not be forgiven. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and every one whoever shall say a word to the Son of Man, it shall be forgiven to him, but to him who to the Holy Spirit did speak evil, it shall not be forgiven. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And every one who shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Spirit it shall not be forgiven. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And, whosoever shall say a word against the Son of Man, it shall be forgiven him; but, unto him who, against the Holy Spirit, speaketh profanely, it shall not be forgiven. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And every one who shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but to him having blasphemed against the Holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiven. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And every one who shall say a word against the Son of Man, it shall be forgiven him; but to him who blasphemes against the Holy Spirit, it shall not be forgiven. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Every one who shall say anything against the Son of Man will be forgiven, but for him who slanders the Holy Spirit there will be no forgiveness. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "Moreover every one who shall speak against the Son of Man, may obtain forgiveness; but he who blasphemes the Holy Spirit will never obtain forgiveness. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] And every one that shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him; but to him that blasphemes against the Holy Spirit it shall not be forgiven. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* وكل من قال كلمة على ابن الانسان يغفر له. واما من جدف على الروح القدس فلا يغفر له. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Eta norc-ere erranen baitu hitzic guiçonaren Semearen contra barkaturen çayó hari: baina Spiritu sainduaren contra blasphematuren duenari, etzayó barkaturen.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 凡说话干犯人子的，还可得赦免；惟独亵渎圣灵的，总不得赦免。 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 凡說話干犯人子的，還可得赦免；惟獨褻瀆聖靈的，總不得赦免。 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Et quiconque parlera contre le fils de l'homme, il lui sera pardonne; mais à celui qui aura profere des paroles injurieuses contre le Saint Esprit, il ne sera pas pardonne. (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et quiconque parlera contre le Fils de l'homme, il lui sera pardonné; mais à celui qui aura blasphémé contre le Saint-Esprit, il ne lui sera point pardonné. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Und wer da redet ein Wort wider des Menschen Sohn, dem soll es vergeben werden; wer aber lästert den heiligen Geist, dem soll es nicht vergeben werden. (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ed a chiunque avrà detta alcuna parola contro al Figliuol dell’uomo sarà perdonato; ma, a chi avrà bestemmiato contro allo Spirito Santo non sarà perdonato. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Ed a chiunque avrà parlato contro il Figliuol dell’uomo, sarà perdonato; ma a chi avrà bestemmiato contro lo Spirito Santo, non sarà perdonato. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* et omnis qui dicit verbum in Filium hominis remittetur illi ei autem qui in Spiritum Sanctum blasphemaverit non remittetur [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] И всякому, кто скажет слово на Сына Человеческого,прощено будет; а кто скажет хулу на Святаго Духа, тому не простится. [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Och om någon säger något mot Människosonen, så skall det bliva honom förlåtet; men den som hädar den helige Ande, honom skall det icke bliva förlåtet. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] Ang bawa't magsalita ng salitang laban sa Anak ng tao ay patatawarin: nguni't ang magsalita ng kapusungan laban sa Espiritu Santo ay hindi patatawarin. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ai nói nghịch cùng Con người, thì sẽ được tha; song kẻ nói lộng ngôn đến Ðức Thánh Linh, thì không được tha đâu. (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:10 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:9

2018-12-04T17:40:12Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:9}}
* '''[[Luke 12:9 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:9]]''' [[3588|ὁ]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[720|ἀρνησάμενός]] [[3165|με]] [[1799|ἐνώπιον]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[444|ἀνθρώπων]] [[533|ἀπαρνηθήσεται]] [[1799|ἐνώπιον]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[32|ἀγγέλων]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[2316|Θεοῦ]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:9''' But he that denieth me before men shall be denied before the angels of God.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:9 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:9]]''' But he who denies Me before men will be denied before the angels of God.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:9 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:9 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] But he that denyeth me bifor men, schal be denyed bifor the aungels of God. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] And he that denyeth me before men: shalbe denyed before ye angels of God. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But he that denyeth me before men, shalbe denyed before the angels of God. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] And he that denyeth me before men, shalbe denied before þe angels of God. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] And he that denyeth me before men, shalbe denied before the Angels of God. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] But he that denyeth me before men, shalbe denyed before the angels of God. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] But hee that shall denie mee before men, shall be denied before the Angels of God. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] But he that denieth me before men, shalbe denied before the Angels of God. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] but whoever shall renounce me before men, he shall be renounc'd before the angels of God. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] But he that denieth me before men, shall be denied before the angels of God. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] But he that denieth me before men shall be denied before the angels of God. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] But he, that disowneth me before men, shall be disowned before the angels of God. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But he that denieth me before men, shall be denied before the angels of God. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] but he that disowns me before men, shall be disowned before the angels of God. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] But he that denieth me before men, shall be denied before the angels of God. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] but whoever denies me before men, shall be disowned before the angels of God. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But he who denieth me before men, I will deny him before the angels of Aloha. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] but he that has denied me before men, shall be denied before the angels of God. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] He but having denied me in presence of the men, will be denied in presence of the messengers of the God. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] but he that denied me before men shall be denied before the angels of God. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] But he that hath denied me before men, shall be denied before the angels of God. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] but he that denieth me before men shall be denied before the angels of God. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] but he that denieth me in the presence of men shall be denied in the presence of the angels of God. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] but he that shall have denied me before men shall be denied before the angels of God; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and he who hath denied me before men, shall be denied before the messengers of God, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] but he that denieth me in the presence of men shall be denied in the presence of the angels of God. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But, he who denied me before men, shall be denied before the messengers of God. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But the one denying me before the people will be denied before the angels of God. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] but he who denied Me before men shall be denied before the angels of God. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] but he, who disowns me before his fellow-men, will be altogether disowned before God's angels. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] But he who disowns me before men will be disowned before the angels of God. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] but he that denies me before men shall be denied before the angels of God. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> ومن انكرني قدام الناس ينكر قدام ملائكة الله. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Baina ni guiçonén aitzinean vkaturen nauena, vkatua içanen da Iaincoaren Aingueruén aitzinean.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:9) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:9 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* mais celui qui m'aura renie devant les hommes sera renie devant les anges de Dieu. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Mais quiconque me reniera devant les hommes, il sera renié devant les Anges de Dieu. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Wer mich aber verleugnet vor den Menschen, der wird verleugnet werden vor den Engeln Gottes. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ma chi mi avrà rinnegato davanti agli uomini sarà rinnegato davanti agli angeli di Dio. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] ma chi mi avrà rinnegato davanti agli uomini, sarà rinnegato davanti agli angeli di Dio. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* qui autem negaverit me coram hominibus denegabitur coram angelis Dei [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] а кто отвергнется Меня пред человеками, тот отвержен будет пред Ангелами Божиими. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:9 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Lakini, mtu yeyote anayenikana mbele ya watu, naye atakanwa mbele ya malaika wa Mungu.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men den som förnekar mig inför människorna, han skall ock bliva förnekad inför Guds änglar. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Datapuwa't ang magkaila sa akin sa harap ng mga tao, ay ikakaila sa harap ng mga anghel ng Dios. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Nhưng ai chối ta trước mặt thiên hạ, thì họ sẽ bị chối trước mặt thiên sứ của Ðức Chúa Trời. (Lu-ca 12:9 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:9 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:9

2018-12-04T17:40:01Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

Luke 12:8

2018-12-04T17:39:33Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:8}}
* '''[[Luke 12:8 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:8]]''' [[3004|λέγω]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[5213|ὑμῖν]], [[3956|Πᾶς]] [[3739|ὃς]] [[302|ἂν]] [[3670|ὁμολογήσῃ]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[698|ἐμοὶ]] [[1715|ἔμπροσθεν]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[444|ἀνθρώπων]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[5207|υἱὸς]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[444|ἀνθρώπου]] [[3670|ὁμολογήσει]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[846|αὐτῷ]] [[1715|ἔμπροσθεν]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[32|ἀγγέλων]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[2316|Θεοῦ]]·

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:8''' Also I say unto you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God:

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:8 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:8]]''' “Also I say to you, whoever confesses Me before men, him the Son of Man also will confess before the angels of God.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:8 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:8 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] Treuli Y seie to you, ech man that knoulechith me bifor men, mannus sone schal knouleche hym bifor the aungels of God. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] I saye vnto you: Whosoever confesseth me before men eve him shall ye sonne of man confesse also before ye angels of God. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] I saye vnto you: Who so euer knowlegeth me before men, him shal the sonne of ma also knowlege before the angels of God: (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] I saye vnto you euery one: whosoeuer confesseth me before men, him shal þe sonne of man knowledge also before þe angels of God ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] I saye vnto you whosoeuer confesseth me before men, euen hym shall the sonne of man confesse also before the Angels of God. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Also I say vnto you, whosoeuer confesseth me before men, hym shall the sonne of man knowledge also, before the angels of God. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Also I say vnto you, Whosoeuer shall confesse mee before men, him shall the Sonne of man confesse also before the Angels of God. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] Also I say vnto you, Whosoeuer shall confesse me before men, him shall the Sonne of man also confesse before the Angels of God. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] moreover I declare unto you, whoever shall acknowledge me before men, him shall the son of man also own before the angels of God. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] Also I say unto you that, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] Also I say unto you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] But I say unto you, Whosoever shall own me before men, the Son of man will also own him before the angels of God. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows. And I say to you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But I tell you, Every one who shall confess me before men, him will the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] Also I say to you, Whoever shall confess me before men, him will the Son of man also confess before the angels of God. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Moreover, I say to you, whoever shall acknowledge me before me, him the Son of Man will acknowledge before the angels of God; (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But I tell you that every one who shall confess me before men, the Son of man will also confess him before the angels of Aloha. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And I tell you, that whoever shall confess me before men, him will the Son of man confess before the angels of God; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] I say and to you: All whoever may confess to me in presence of the men, also the son of the man will confess in him in presence of the messengers of the God. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And I say to you: Every one that shall acknowledge me before men, him will the Son of man also acknowledge before the angels of God; (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And I say to you, Every one that acknowledgeth me before men, him will the Son of man also acknowledge before the angels of God. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] Also I say unto you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And I say unto you, Every one who shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But I say to you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, the Son of man will confess him also before the angels of God; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `And I say to you, Every one -- whoever may confess with me before men, the Son of Man also shall confess with him before the messengers of God, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And I say unto you, Every one who shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I say unto you––Whosoever shall confess me before men, even the Son of Man, will confess him, before the messengers of God; (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But I say unto you, that every one who may confess me before the people, the Son of man will also confess him before the angels of God. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] "And I say to you, every one who shall confess Me before men, him will the Son of Man confess before the angels of God; (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Every one, I tell you, who shall acknowledge me before his fellow-men, the Son of Man, also, will acknowledge before God's angels; (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "And I tell you that every man who shall have acknowledged me before men, the Son of Man will also acknowledge before the angels of God. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But I say to you: Whoever confesses me before men, him also shall the Son of man confess before the angels of God; (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> واقول لكم كل من اعترف بي قدام الناس يعترف به ابن الانسان قدام ملائكة الله. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Badiotsuet bada, Norc-ere ni aithorturen bainau guiçonen aitzinean, guiçonaren Semeac-ere aithorturen du hura Iaincoaren Aingueruén aitzinean.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:8) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:8 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Et je vous dis: Quiconque m'aura confesse devant les hommes, le fils de l'homme le confessera aussi devant les anges de Dieu; (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Or je vous dis, que quiconque me confessera devant les hommes, le Fils de l'homme le confessera aussi devant les Anges de Dieu. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Ich aber sage euch: Wer mich bekennet vor den Menschen, den wird auch des Menschen Sohn bekennen vor den Engeln Gottes. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Or io vi dico: Chiunque mi avrà riconosciuto davanti agli uomini, il Figliuol dell’uomo altresì lo riconoscerà davanti agli angeli di Dio. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Or io vi dico: Chiunque mi avrà riconosciuto davanti agli uomini, anche il Figliuol dell’uomo riconoscerà lui davanti agli angeli di Dio; (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* dico autem vobis omnis quicumque confessus fuerit in me coram hominibus et Filius hominis confitebitur in illo coram angelis Dei [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Сказываю же вам: всякого, кто исповедает Меня пред человеками, и Сын Человеческий исповедает пред Ангелами Божиими; [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:8 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Nawaambieni kweli, kila mtu anayekiri hadharani kwamba yeye ni wangu, Mwana wa Mtu naye atakiri mbele ya malaika wa Mungu kwamba mtu huyo ni wake.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Och jag säger eder: Var och en som bekänner mig inför människorna, honom skall ock Människosonen kännas vid inför Guds änglar. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinasabi ko sa inyo, Ang bawa't kumikilala sa akin sa harap ng mga tao, ay kikilalanin naman siya ng Anak ng tao sa harap ng mga anghel ng Dios: (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ta nói cùng các ngươi, ai sẽ xưng ta trước một thiên hạ, thì Con người cũng sẽ xưng họ trước mặt thiên sứ của Ðức Chúa Trời. (Lu-ca 12:8 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:8 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:8

2018-12-04T17:39:22Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:8}}
* '''[[Luke 12:8 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:8]]''' [[3004|λέγω]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[5213|ὑμῖν]], [[3956|Πᾶς]] [[3739|ὃς]] [[302|ἂν]] [[3670|ὁμολογήσῃ]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[698|ἐμοὶ]] [[1715|ἔμπροσθεν]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[444|ἀνθρώπων]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[5207|υἱὸς]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[444|ἀνθρώπου]] [[3670|ὁμολογήσει]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[846|αὐτῷ]] [[1715|ἔμπροσθεν]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[32|ἀγγέλων]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[2316|Θεοῦ]]·

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:8''' Also I say unto you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God:

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:8 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:8]]''' “Also I say to you, whoever confesses Me before men, him the Son of Man also will confess before the angels of God.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:8 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:8 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] Treuli Y seie to you, ech man that knoulechith me bifor men, mannus sone schal knouleche hym bifor the aungels of God. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] I saye vnto you: Whosoever confesseth me before men eve him shall ye sonne of man confesse also before ye angels of God. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] I saye vnto you: Who so euer knowlegeth me before men, him shal the sonne of ma also knowlege before the angels of God: (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] I saye vnto you euery one: whosoeuer confesseth me before men, him shal þe sonne of man knowledge also before þe angels of God ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] I saye vnto you whosoeuer confesseth me before men, euen hym shall the sonne of man confesse also before the Angels of God. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Also I say vnto you, whosoeuer confesseth me before men, hym shall the sonne of man knowledge also, before the angels of God. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Also I say vnto you, Whosoeuer shall confesse mee before men, him shall the Sonne of man confesse also before the Angels of God. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] Also I say vnto you, Whosoeuer shall confesse me before men, him shall the Sonne of man also confesse before the Angels of God. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] moreover I declare unto you, whoever shall acknowledge me before men, him shall the son of man also own before the angels of God. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] Also I say unto you that, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] Also I say unto you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] But I say unto you, Whosoever shall own me before men, the Son of man will also own him before the angels of God. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows. And I say to you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But I tell you, Every one who shall confess me before men, him will the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] Also I say to you, Whoever shall confess me before men, him will the Son of man also confess before the angels of God. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Moreover, I say to you, whoever shall acknowledge me before me, him the Son of Man will acknowledge before the angels of God; (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But I tell you that every one who shall confess me before men, the Son of man will also confess him before the angels of Aloha. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And I tell you, that whoever shall confess me before men, him will the Son of man confess before the angels of God; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] I say and to you: All whoever may confess to me in presence of the men, also the son of the man will confess in him in presence of the messengers of the God. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And I say to you: Every one that shall acknowledge me before men, him will the Son of man also acknowledge before the angels of God; (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And I say to you, Every one that acknowledgeth me before men, him will the Son of man also acknowledge before the angels of God. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] Also I say unto you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And I say unto you, Every one who shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But I say to you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, the Son of man will confess him also before the angels of God; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `And I say to you, Every one -- whoever may confess with me before men, the Son of Man also shall confess with him before the messengers of God, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And I say unto you, Every one who shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God: ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I say unto you––Whosoever shall confess me before men, even the Son of Man, will confess him, before the messengers of God; (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But I say unto you, that every one who may confess me before the people, the Son of man will also confess him before the angels of God. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] "And I say to you, every one who shall confess Me before men, him will the Son of Man confess before the angels of God; (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Every one, I tell you, who shall acknowledge me before his fellow-men, the Son of Man, also, will acknowledge before God's angels; (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "And I tell you that every man who shall have acknowledged me before men, the Son of Man will also acknowledge before the angels of God. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But I say to you: Whoever confesses me before men, him also shall the Son of man confess before the angels of God; (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* واقول لكم كل من اعترف بي قدام الناس يعترف به ابن الانسان قدام ملائكة الله. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Badiotsuet bada, Norc-ere ni aithorturen bainau guiçonen aitzinean, guiçonaren Semeac-ere aithorturen du hura Iaincoaren Aingueruén aitzinean.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 我又告诉你们，凡在人面前认我的，人子在神的使者面前也必认他； (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 我又告訴你們，凡在人面前認我的，人子在神的使者面前也必認他； (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Et je vous dis: Quiconque m'aura confesse devant les hommes, le fils de l'homme le confessera aussi devant les anges de Dieu; (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Or je vous dis, que quiconque me confessera devant les hommes, le Fils de l'homme le confessera aussi devant les Anges de Dieu. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Ich aber sage euch: Wer mich bekennet vor den Menschen, den wird auch des Menschen Sohn bekennen vor den Engeln Gottes. (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Or io vi dico: Chiunque mi avrà riconosciuto davanti agli uomini, il Figliuol dell’uomo altresì lo riconoscerà davanti agli angeli di Dio. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Or io vi dico: Chiunque mi avrà riconosciuto davanti agli uomini, anche il Figliuol dell’uomo riconoscerà lui davanti agli angeli di Dio; (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* dico autem vobis omnis quicumque confessus fuerit in me coram hominibus et Filius hominis confitebitur in illo coram angelis Dei [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] Сказываю же вам: всякого, кто исповедает Меня пред человеками, и Сын Человеческий исповедает пред Ангелами Божиими; [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Och jag säger eder: Var och en som bekänner mig inför människorna, honom skall ock Människosonen kännas vid inför Guds änglar. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinasabi ko sa inyo, Ang bawa't kumikilala sa akin sa harap ng mga tao, ay kikilalanin naman siya ng Anak ng tao sa harap ng mga anghel ng Dios: (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ta nói cùng các ngươi, ai sẽ xưng ta trước một thiên hạ, thì Con người cũng sẽ xưng họ trước mặt thiên sứ của Ðức Chúa Trời. (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:8 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:7

2018-12-04T17:39:02Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:7}}
* '''[[Luke 12:7 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:7]]''' [[235|ἀλλὰ]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|αἱ]] [[2359|τρίχες]] [[3588|τῆς]] [[2776|κεφαλῆς]] [[5216|ὑμῶν]] [[3956|πᾶσαι]] [[705|ἠρίθμηνται]]. [[3361|μὴ]] [[3767|οὖν]] [[5399|φοβεῖσθε]]· [[4183|πολλῶν]] [[4765|στρουθίων]] [[1308|διαφέρετε]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:7''' But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:7 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:7]]''' But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Do not fear therefore; you are of more value than many sparrows.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:7 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:7 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] But also alle the heeris of youre heed ben noumbrid. Therfor nyle ye drede; ye ben of more prijs than many sparowis. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] Also even the very heres of youre heedes are nombred. Feare not therfore: ye are moare of value then many sparowes. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] The very hayres of youre heade also are nombred euery one. Feare not therfore, for ye are better then many sparowes. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] Also, euen þe very heeres of youre heed are all nombred. Feare not therfore: ye are moare of value then many sparowes. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] Also euen the very heares of your heades are numbred. Feare not therfore: Ye are more of value then many sparowes. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Also, eue the very heeres of your head are all numbred. Feare not therfore, ye are more of value the many sparrowes. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Yea, and all the heares of your head are nombred: feare not therefore: yee are more of value then many sparowes. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] But euen the very haires of your head are all numbred: Feare not therefore, ye are of more value then many sparrowes. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] nay, the very hairs of your head can't fall without being number'd: be not then afraid; there is no comparison between you and sparrows. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] But even the very hairs of your head are all numbred. Fear not therefore; for ye are of more value than many sparrows. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Nay the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Be not therefore afraid; ye are of more worth than many sparrows. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered: fear not then, ye are of more value than many sparrows. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] yes, the very hairs of your head are all numbered: fear not, therefore; you are much more valuable than sparrows. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But of you, the numbers of the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not, therefore; than many sparrows more precious are you. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not, therefore, for you are of more value than many sparrows. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] But also the hairs of the head of you all have been numbered. Not therefore fear you; many sparrows you are better. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not; ye are of more value than many sparrows. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: ye are of more value than many sparrows. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] But the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: ye are of more value than many sparrows. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore, ye are better than many sparrows. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] but even the hairs of your head have been all numbered; therefore fear ye not, than many sparrows ye are of more value. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] But the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: ye are of more value than many sparrows. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But, even the hairs of your head, have all been numbered: Be not afraid: many sparrows, ye excel. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: ye are more important than many sparrows. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But even the hairs of your head have all been numbered; fear not, ye are of more value than many sparrows. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] No, the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Do not be afraid; you are of more value than many sparrows. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] But the very hairs on your heads are all counted. Away with fear: you are more precious than a multitude of sparrows.' (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: you are of more value than many sparrows. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> بل شعور رؤوسكم ايضا جميعها محصاة. فلا تخافوا انتم افضل من عصافير كثيرة. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Baina çuen buruco bilo guciac-ere contatuac dirade etzaretela beraz beldur: parra-chori araldeac baino guehiago balio duçue çuec.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:7) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:7 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Mais les cheveux meme de votre tete sont tous comptes. Ne craignez donc pas: vous valez mieux que beaucoup de passereaux. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Tous les cheveux même de votre tête sont comptés; ne craignez donc point; vous valez mieux que beaucoup de passereaux. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Aber auch die Haare auf eurem Haupt sind alle gezählt. Darum fürchtet euch nicht; ihr seid besser denn viele Sperlinge. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Anzi eziandio i capelli del vostro capo son tutti annoverati; non temiate adunque; voi siete da più di molte passere. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] anzi, perfino i capelli del vostro capo son tutti contati. Non temete dunque; voi siete da più di molti passeri. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* sed et capilli capitis vestri omnes numerati sunt nolite ergo timere multis passeribus pluris estis [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] А у вас и волосы на голове все сочтены. Итак не бойтесь: вы дороже многих малых птиц. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:7 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Lakini hata nywele za vichwa vyenu zimehesabiwa zote. Msiogope, basi, ninyi mna thamani zaidi kuliko shomoro wengi!

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men på eder äro till och med huvudhåren allasammans räknade. Frukten icke; I ären mer värda än många sparvar. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Datapuwa't maging ang mga buhok ng inyong ulo ay pawang bilang na lahat. Huwag kayong mangatakot: kayo'y lalong mahalaga kay sa maraming maya. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Dầu đến tóc trên đầu các ngươi cũng đã đếm cả rồi. Ðừng sợ chi, vì các ngươi trọng hơn nhiều chim sẻ. (Lu-ca 12:7 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:7 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:7

2018-12-04T17:38:51Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:7}}
* '''[[Luke 12:7 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:7]]''' [[235|ἀλλὰ]] [[2532|καὶ]] [[3588|αἱ]] [[2359|τρίχες]] [[3588|τῆς]] [[2776|κεφαλῆς]] [[5216|ὑμῶν]] [[3956|πᾶσαι]] [[705|ἠρίθμηνται]]. [[3361|μὴ]] [[3767|οὖν]] [[5399|φοβεῖσθε]]· [[4183|πολλῶν]] [[4765|στρουθίων]] [[1308|διαφέρετε]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:7''' But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:7 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:7]]''' But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Do not fear therefore; you are of more value than many sparrows.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:7 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:7 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] But also alle the heeris of youre heed ben noumbrid. Therfor nyle ye drede; ye ben of more prijs than many sparowis. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] Also even the very heres of youre heedes are nombred. Feare not therfore: ye are moare of value then many sparowes. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] The very hayres of youre heade also are nombred euery one. Feare not therfore, for ye are better then many sparowes. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] Also, euen þe very heeres of youre heed are all nombred. Feare not therfore: ye are moare of value then many sparowes. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] Also euen the very heares of your heades are numbred. Feare not therfore: Ye are more of value then many sparowes. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Also, eue the very heeres of your head are all numbred. Feare not therfore, ye are more of value the many sparrowes. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Yea, and all the heares of your head are nombred: feare not therefore: yee are more of value then many sparowes. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] But euen the very haires of your head are all numbred: Feare not therefore, ye are of more value then many sparrowes. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] nay, the very hairs of your head can't fall without being number'd: be not then afraid; there is no comparison between you and sparrows. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] But even the very hairs of your head are all numbred. Fear not therefore; for ye are of more value than many sparrows. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Nay the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Be not therefore afraid; ye are of more worth than many sparrows. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered: fear not then, ye are of more value than many sparrows. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] yes, the very hairs of your head are all numbered: fear not, therefore; you are much more valuable than sparrows. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But of you, the numbers of the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not, therefore; than many sparrows more precious are you. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not, therefore, for you are of more value than many sparrows. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] But also the hairs of the head of you all have been numbered. Not therefore fear you; many sparrows you are better. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not; ye are of more value than many sparrows. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: ye are of more value than many sparrows. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] But the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: ye are of more value than many sparrows. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore, ye are better than many sparrows. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] but even the hairs of your head have been all numbered; therefore fear ye not, than many sparrows ye are of more value. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] But the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: ye are of more value than many sparrows. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But, even the hairs of your head, have all been numbered: Be not afraid: many sparrows, ye excel. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: ye are more important than many sparrows. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But even the hairs of your head have all been numbered; fear not, ye are of more value than many sparrows. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] No, the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Do not be afraid; you are of more value than many sparrows. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] But the very hairs on your heads are all counted. Away with fear: you are more precious than a multitude of sparrows.' (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But even the hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not: you are of more value than many sparrows. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* بل شعور رؤوسكم ايضا جميعها محصاة. فلا تخافوا انتم افضل من عصافير كثيرة. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Baina çuen buruco bilo guciac-ere contatuac dirade etzaretela beraz beldur: parra-chori araldeac baino guehiago balio duçue çuec.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 就是你们的头发，也都被数过了。不要惧怕，你们比许多麻雀还贵重！ (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 就是你們的頭髮，也都被數過了。不要懼怕，你們比許多麻雀還貴重！ (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Mais les cheveux meme de votre tete sont tous comptes. Ne craignez donc pas: vous valez mieux que beaucoup de passereaux. (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Tous les cheveux même de votre tête sont comptés; ne craignez donc point; vous valez mieux que beaucoup de passereaux. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Aber auch die Haare auf eurem Haupt sind alle gezählt. Darum fürchtet euch nicht; ihr seid besser denn viele Sperlinge. (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Anzi eziandio i capelli del vostro capo son tutti annoverati; non temiate adunque; voi siete da più di molte passere. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] anzi, perfino i capelli del vostro capo son tutti contati. Non temete dunque; voi siete da più di molti passeri. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* sed et capilli capitis vestri omnes numerati sunt nolite ergo timere multis passeribus pluris estis [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] А у вас и волосы на голове все сочтены. Итак не бойтесь: вы дороже многих малых птиц. [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men på eder äro till och med huvudhåren allasammans räknade. Frukten icke; I ären mer värda än många sparvar. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] Datapuwa't maging ang mga buhok ng inyong ulo ay pawang bilang na lahat. Huwag kayong mangatakot: kayo'y lalong mahalaga kay sa maraming maya. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Dầu đến tóc trên đầu các ngươi cũng đã đếm cả rồi. Ðừng sợ chi, vì các ngươi trọng hơn nhiều chim sẻ. (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:7 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:6

2018-12-04T17:38:18Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:6}}
* '''[[Luke 12:6 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:6]]''' [[3780|οὐχὶ]] [[4002|πέντε]] [[4765|στρουθία]] [[4453|πωλεῖται]] [[787|ἀσσαρίων]] [[1417|δύο]]; [[2532|καὶ]] [[1520|ἓν]] [[1537|ἐξ]] [[846|αὐτῶν]] [[3756|οὐκ]] [[2076|ἔστιν]] [[1950|ἐπιλελησμένον]] [[1799|ἐνώπιον]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[2316|Θεοῦ]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:6''' Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten before God?

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:6 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:6]]''' “Are not five sparrows sold for two copper coins? And not one of them is forgotten before God.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:6 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:6 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] Whether fyue sparowis ben not seld for twei halpens; and oon of hem is not in foryetyng bifor God? ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] Are not five sparowes bought for two farthinges? And yet not one of them is forgotten of God. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Are not fyue sparowes bought for two farthinges? Yet is not one of them forgotten before God. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] Are not fyue sparowes bought for two farthinges? And not one of them is forgoten of God. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Are not fyue sparrowes bought for two farthynges? and not one of them is forgotten before God. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Are not fiue sparowes bought for two farthings, and yet not one of them is forgotten before God? ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] Are not fiue sparrowes solde for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten before God? ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] are not five sparrows sold for two pence? however the divine providence extends to each of them. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten before God? (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten before God? ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Are not five sparrows sold for two assaries, and not one of them is forgotten before God. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings? Yet not one of them is forgotten before God. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings, yet not one of them is forgotten before God? (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten before God? (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Are not five sparrows sold for two pence? Yet not one of them is forgotten by God: (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] Are not five sparrows sold for two asorin; and one of them is not forgotten before Aloha. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Are not five sparrows sold for two assarions [3 cents], and one of them is not forgotten before God? (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Not five sparrows are sold assarii two? and one out of them not is being forgotten in presence of the God. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Are not five sparrows sold for two pence? And not one of them is forgotten before God. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Are not five sparrows sold for two pennies? and not one of them is forgotten before God. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten before God? ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings? and not one of them is forgotten in the sight of God. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] Are not five sparrows sold for two assaria? and one of them is not forgotten before God. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `Are not five sparrows sold for two assars? and one of them is not forgotten before God, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] Are not five sparrows sold for two pence? and not one of them is forgotten in the sight of God. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Are not, five sparrows, sold for two farthings? and, not one from among them, hath been forgotten before God. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Are not five sparrows sold for two pennies? and one of them is not forgotten before God. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] "Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings? and one of them is not forgotten before God. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Are not five sparrows sold for a penny? Yet not one of them has escaped God's notice. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Are not five sparrows sold for a penny? and yet not one of them is a thing forgotten in God's sight. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings? And yet not one of them is forgotten before God. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> أليست خمسة عصافير تباع بفلسين. وواحد منها ليس منسيا امام الله. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eztira borz parra-chori bi dirutchotan saltzen, eta hetaric bat ezpaita ahanciric Iaincoaren aitzinean ?

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:6) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:6 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Ne vend-on pas cinq passereaux pour deux sous? et pas un seul d'entre eux n'est oublie devant Dieu. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Ne donne-t-on pas cinq petits passereaux pour deux pites? Et cependant un seul d'eux n'est point oublié devant Dieu. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Verkauft man nicht fünf Sperlinge um zwei Pfennige? Dennoch ist vor Gott deren nicht eines vergessen. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Cinque passere non si vendono elleno per due quattrini? e pur niuna di esse è dimenticata appo Iddio. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Cinque passeri non si vendon per due soldi? Eppure non uno d’essi è dimenticato dinanzi a Dio; (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* nonne quinque passeres veneunt dipundio et unus ex illis non est in oblivione coram Deo [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Не пять ли малых птиц продаются за два ассария? и ни одна из них не забыта у Бога. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:6 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Inajulikana kwamba shomoro watano huuzwa kwa senti kumi, au sivyo? Lakini mbele ya Mungu hasahauliki hata mmoja.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Säljas icke fem sparvar för två skärvar? Och icke en av dem är förgäten hos Gud. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Hindi baga ipinagbibili ang limang maya sa dalawang beles? at isa man sa kanila ay hindi nalilimutan sa paningin ng Dios. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Người ta há chẳng bán năm con chim sẻ giá hai đồng tiền sao? Nhưng Ðức Chúa Trời không quên một con nào hết. (Lu-ca 12:6 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:6 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:6

2018-12-04T17:38:06Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

Luke 12:5

2018-12-04T17:37:45Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:5}}
* '''[[Luke 12:5 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:5]]''' [[5263|ὑποδείξω]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[5213|ὑμῖν]] [[5101|τίνα]] [[5399|φοβηθῆτε]]· [[5399|φοβήθητε]] [[3588|τὸν]] [[3326|μετὰ]] [[3588|τὸ]] [[615|ἀποκτεῖναι]] [[1849|ἐξουσίαν]] [[2192|ἔχοντα]] [[1685|ἐμβαλεῖν]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[3588|τὴν]] [[1067|γέενναν]]· [[3483|ναί]], [[3004|λέγω]] [[5213|ὑμῖν]], [[5126|τοῦτον]] [[5399|φοβήθητε]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:5''' But I will forewarn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:5 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:5]]''' But I will forewarn you whom you should reverence: Reverence Him who, after He has killed, has authority to cast into hell; yes, I say to you, reverence Him!

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:5 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:5 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] But Y schal schewe to you, whom ye schulen drede; drede ye hym, that aftir he hath slayn, he hath power to sende in to helle. And so Y seie to you, drede ye hym. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] But I will shewe you whom ye shall feare. Feare him which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell. Ye I saye vnto you him feare. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But I wil shewe you, whom ye shal feare. Feare him, which after he hath kylled, hath power also to cast in to hell: Yee I saye vnto you: (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] But I will shewe you, whom ye shall feare. Feare him, which after he hath kylled, hath power to cast into hell. Yee, I saye vnto you: feare him. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] But I wil shew you whom ye shall feare. Feare hym whiche after he hath kylled, hath power to caste into hell. Yea I saye vnto you, hym feare. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] But I wyll forewarne you who you shall feare: Feare hym, which after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell, yea I say vnto you, feare hym. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] But I wil forewarne you, who ye shal feare: feare him which after hee hath killed, hath power to cast into hell: yea, I say vnto you, him feare. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] But I will forewarne you whom you shall feare: Feare him, which after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell, yea, I say vnto you, Feare him. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] but I will inform you whom you should fear: fear him, who after he has kill'd, has power to precipitate into hell; yes, I advise you, fear him. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] But I will forewarn you whom you shall fear: Him who, after he hath killed, hath power to cast into gehenna; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] But I will forewarn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] But I will shew you whom ye should fear,---Fear Him, who after He hath killed, hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, fear Him. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But I will show you whom ye shall fear: fear him, who after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell: yea, I say to you, fear him. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But I will point out to you, whom ye should fear: Fear him, who, after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him! (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] But I will forewarn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, who after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell; yes, I say to you, Fear him. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] but I will show you whom you ought to fear; fear him, who, after he has killed, has power to cast into hell. I repeat it to you, Fear him. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] but I will show you whom you shall fear; Him who, after he hath killed, hath power to cast into gihana, yes, I say to you, Fear this (one). ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] But I will show you whom to fear; Fear him, who after killing has power to cast into hell; yes, I tell you, Fear him. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] I will point out and to you, whom you should fear; you should fear the after the to have killed, authority having to cast into the gehenna; yes I say to you, this fear you. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] But I will warn you whom ye shall fear; fear him, who after he has killed has power to cast into hell; yea, I say to you, fear him. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] But I will warn you whom to fear; fear him who after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say to you, fear him. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] But I will forewarn you whom you shall fear: Fear him, which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] But I will warn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But I will shew you whom ye shall fear: Fear him who after he has killed has authority to cast into hell; yea, I say to you, Fear him. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] but I will show to you, whom ye may fear; Fear him who, after the killing, is having authority to cast to the gehenna; yes, I say to you, Fear ye Him. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] But I will warn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, who after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But I will suggest to you, whom ye should fear––Fear him who, after killing, hath authority to cast into gehenna,––Yea, I say unto you––Him, fear ye. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But I will show you whom you must fear: Fear him, who after he kills has power to cast into hell. Yea, I say unto you, Fear him. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] but I will show you Whom ye should fear; fear Him Who, after killing, has authority to cast into Hell; yea, I say to you, fear Him. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] I will show you of whom you should be afraid. Be afraid of him who, after killing you, has the power to fling you into the Pit. Yes, I say, be afraid of him. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] I will warn you whom to fear: fear him who after killing has power to throw into Gehenna: yes, I say to you, fear him. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But I will show you whom you shall fear: Fear him who after he has killed has authority to cast into hell. Yes, I say to you, fear him. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> بل اريكم ممن تخافون. خافوا من الذي بعدما يقتل له سلطان ان يلقي في جهنم. نعم اقول لكم من هذا خافوا. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Baina eracutsiren drauçuet noren beldur behar çareten: çareten beldur, hil duqueenean gehennara egoiztecó authoritatea duenarén: are diotsuet, haren beldur çareten.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:5) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:5 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* mais je vous montrerai qui vous devez craindre: craignez celui qui, apres avoir tue, a le pouvoir de jeter dans la gehenne: oui, vous dis-je, craignez celui-là. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Mais je vous montrerai qui vous devez craindre; craignez celui qui a la puissance, après qu'il a tué, d'envoyer dans la géhenne; oui, vous dis-je, craignez celui-là. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Ich will euch aber zeigen, vor welchem ihr euch fürchten sollt: Fürchtet euch vor dem, der, nachdem er getötet hat, auch Macht hat, zu werfen in die Hölle. Ja, ich sage euch, vor dem fürchtet euch. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ma io vi mostrerò chi dovete temere: temete colui, il quale, dopo aver ucciso, ha la podestà di gettar nella geenna; certo, io vi dico, temete lui. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] ma io vi mostrerò chi dovete temere: Temete colui che, dopo aver ucciso, ha potestà di gettar nella geenna. Sì, vi dico, temete Lui. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* ostendam autem vobis quem timeatis timete eum qui postquam occiderit habet potestatem mittere in gehennam ita dico vobis hunc timete [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] но скажу вам, кого бояться: бойтесь того, кто, по убиении, может ввергнуть в геенну: ей,говорю вам, того бойтесь. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:5 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Nitawaonyesheni yule ambaye ni lazima kumwogopa: mwogopeni yule ambaye baada ya kuua ana uwezo wa kumtupa mtu katika moto wa Jehanamu. Naam, ninawaambieni, mwogopeni huyo.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Jag vill lära eder vem I skolen frukta: frukten honom som har makt att, sedan han har dräpt, också kasta i Gehenna. Ja, jag säger eder: Honom skolen I frukta. -- (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Datapuwa't ipinagpapauna ko sa inyo kung sino ang inyong katatakutan: Katakutan ninyo yaong pagkatapos na pumatay, ay may kapangyarihang magbulid sa impierno; tunay, sinasabi ko sa inyo, Siya ninyong katakutan. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Song ta chỉ cho các ngươi biết phải sợ ai: phải sợ Ðấng khi đã giết rồi, có quyền bỏ xuống địa ngục; phải ta nói cùng các ngươi, ấy là Ðấng các ngươi phải sợ! (Lu-ca 12:5 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:5 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:5

2018-12-04T17:37:33Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:5}}
* '''[[Luke 12:5 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:5]]''' [[5263|ὑποδείξω]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[5213|ὑμῖν]] [[5101|τίνα]] [[5399|φοβηθῆτε]]· [[5399|φοβήθητε]] [[3588|τὸν]] [[3326|μετὰ]] [[3588|τὸ]] [[615|ἀποκτεῖναι]] [[1849|ἐξουσίαν]] [[2192|ἔχοντα]] [[1685|ἐμβαλεῖν]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[3588|τὴν]] [[1067|γέενναν]]· [[3483|ναί]], [[3004|λέγω]] [[5213|ὑμῖν]], [[5126|τοῦτον]] [[5399|φοβήθητε]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:5''' But I will forewarn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:5 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:5]]''' But I will forewarn you whom you should reverence: Reverence Him who, after He has killed, has authority to cast into hell; yes, I say to you, reverence Him!

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:5 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:5 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] But Y schal schewe to you, whom ye schulen drede; drede ye hym, that aftir he hath slayn, he hath power to sende in to helle. And so Y seie to you, drede ye hym. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] But I will shewe you whom ye shall feare. Feare him which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell. Ye I saye vnto you him feare. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But I wil shewe you, whom ye shal feare. Feare him, which after he hath kylled, hath power also to cast in to hell: Yee I saye vnto you: (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] But I will shewe you, whom ye shall feare. Feare him, which after he hath kylled, hath power to cast into hell. Yee, I saye vnto you: feare him. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] But I wil shew you whom ye shall feare. Feare hym whiche after he hath kylled, hath power to caste into hell. Yea I saye vnto you, hym feare. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] But I wyll forewarne you who you shall feare: Feare hym, which after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell, yea I say vnto you, feare hym. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] But I wil forewarne you, who ye shal feare: feare him which after hee hath killed, hath power to cast into hell: yea, I say vnto you, him feare. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] But I will forewarne you whom you shall feare: Feare him, which after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell, yea, I say vnto you, Feare him. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] but I will inform you whom you should fear: fear him, who after he has kill'd, has power to precipitate into hell; yes, I advise you, fear him. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] But I will forewarn you whom you shall fear: Him who, after he hath killed, hath power to cast into gehenna; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] But I will forewarn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] But I will shew you whom ye should fear,---Fear Him, who after He hath killed, hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, fear Him. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But I will show you whom ye shall fear: fear him, who after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell: yea, I say to you, fear him. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But I will point out to you, whom ye should fear: Fear him, who, after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him! (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] But I will forewarn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, who after he hath killed, hath power to cast into hell; yes, I say to you, Fear him. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] but I will show you whom you ought to fear; fear him, who, after he has killed, has power to cast into hell. I repeat it to you, Fear him. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] but I will show you whom you shall fear; Him who, after he hath killed, hath power to cast into gihana, yes, I say to you, Fear this (one). ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] But I will show you whom to fear; Fear him, who after killing has power to cast into hell; yes, I tell you, Fear him. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] I will point out and to you, whom you should fear; you should fear the after the to have killed, authority having to cast into the gehenna; yes I say to you, this fear you. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] But I will warn you whom ye shall fear; fear him, who after he has killed has power to cast into hell; yea, I say to you, fear him. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] But I will warn you whom to fear; fear him who after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say to you, fear him. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] But I will forewarn you whom you shall fear: Fear him, which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] But I will warn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But I will shew you whom ye shall fear: Fear him who after he has killed has authority to cast into hell; yea, I say to you, Fear him. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] but I will show to you, whom ye may fear; Fear him who, after the killing, is having authority to cast to the gehenna; yes, I say to you, Fear ye Him. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] But I will warn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, who after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But I will suggest to you, whom ye should fear––Fear him who, after killing, hath authority to cast into gehenna,––Yea, I say unto you––Him, fear ye. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But I will show you whom you must fear: Fear him, who after he kills has power to cast into hell. Yea, I say unto you, Fear him. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] but I will show you Whom ye should fear; fear Him Who, after killing, has authority to cast into Hell; yea, I say to you, fear Him. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] I will show you of whom you should be afraid. Be afraid of him who, after killing you, has the power to fling you into the Pit. Yes, I say, be afraid of him. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] I will warn you whom to fear: fear him who after killing has power to throw into Gehenna: yes, I say to you, fear him. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But I will show you whom you shall fear: Fear him who after he has killed has authority to cast into hell. Yes, I say to you, fear him. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* بل اريكم ممن تخافون. خافوا من الذي بعدما يقتل له سلطان ان يلقي في جهنم. نعم اقول لكم من هذا خافوا. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Baina eracutsiren drauçuet noren beldur behar çareten: çareten beldur, hil duqueenean gehennara egoiztecó authoritatea duenarén: are diotsuet, haren beldur çareten.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 我要指示你们当怕的是谁：当怕那杀了以後又有权柄丢在地狱里的。我实在告诉你们，正要怕他。 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 我要指示你們當怕的是誰：當怕那殺了以後又有權柄丟在地獄裡的。我實在告訴你們，正要怕他。 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* mais je vous montrerai qui vous devez craindre: craignez celui qui, apres avoir tue, a le pouvoir de jeter dans la gehenne: oui, vous dis-je, craignez celui-là. (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Mais je vous montrerai qui vous devez craindre; craignez celui qui a la puissance, après qu'il a tué, d'envoyer dans la géhenne; oui, vous dis-je, craignez celui-là. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Ich will euch aber zeigen, vor welchem ihr euch fürchten sollt: Fürchtet euch vor dem, der, nachdem er getötet hat, auch Macht hat, zu werfen in die Hölle. Ja, ich sage euch, vor dem fürchtet euch. (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Ma io vi mostrerò chi dovete temere: temete colui, il quale, dopo aver ucciso, ha la podestà di gettar nella geenna; certo, io vi dico, temete lui. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] ma io vi mostrerò chi dovete temere: Temete colui che, dopo aver ucciso, ha potestà di gettar nella geenna. Sì, vi dico, temete Lui. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* ostendam autem vobis quem timeatis timete eum qui postquam occiderit habet potestatem mittere in gehennam ita dico vobis hunc timete [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] но скажу вам, кого бояться: бойтесь того, кто, по убиении, может ввергнуть в геенну: ей,говорю вам, того бойтесь. [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Jag vill lära eder vem I skolen frukta: frukten honom som har makt att, sedan han har dräpt, också kasta i Gehenna. Ja, jag säger eder: Honom skolen I frukta. -- (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] Datapuwa't ipinagpapauna ko sa inyo kung sino ang inyong katatakutan: Katakutan ninyo yaong pagkatapos na pumatay, ay may kapangyarihang magbulid sa impierno; tunay, sinasabi ko sa inyo, Siya ninyong katakutan. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Song ta chỉ cho các ngươi biết phải sợ ai: phải sợ Ðấng khi đã giết rồi, có quyền bỏ xuống địa ngục; phải ta nói cùng các ngươi, ấy là Ðấng các ngươi phải sợ! (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:5 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:4

2018-12-04T17:37:03Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:4}}
* '''[[Luke 12:4 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:4]]''' [[3004|λέγω]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[5213|ὑμῖν]] [[3588|τοῖς]] [[5384|φίλοις]] [[3450|μου]], [[3361|Μὴ]] [[5399|φοβηθῆτε]] [[575|ἀπὸ]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[615|ἀποκτεινόντων]] [[3588|τὸ]] [[4983|σῶμα]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[3326|μετὰ]] [[5023|ταῦτα]] [[3361|μὴ]] [[2192|ἐχόντων]] [[4053|περισσότερόν]] [[5100|τι]] [[4160|ποιῆσαι]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:4''' And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:4 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:4]]''' “And I say to you, My friends, do not be afraid of those who kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:4 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:4 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And Y seie to you, my freendis, be ye not a ferd of hem that sleen the bodie, and aftir these thingis han no more what thei schulen do. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] I saye vnto you my fredes: Be not afrayde of them that kyll the body and after that have no moare that they can do. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But I saye vnto you my frendes: Be not afrayed of them that kyll the body, and after that haue nomore that they can do. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] I saye vnto you my frendes: be not afrayde of them that kyll the body, and after that haue no moare, that they can do. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] I saye vnto you my frendes: Be not afrayde of them that kyll the bodye, and after that haue no more that they can do. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And I say vnto you my friendes, be not afrayde of them that kyll the body, and after that, haue no more that they can do. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And I say vnto you, my friendes, be not afraide of them that kill the bodie, and after that are not able to doe any more. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And I say vnto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that, haue no more that they can doe. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] As for you, my friends, be not afraid of those, who can kill the body, and after that can effect nothing more. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And I say unto you, my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, but are not able to kill the soul, and have not any more that they can do. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Now I say unto you, my friends, Be not afraid of them, that can only kill the body, and after that have nothing more that they can do. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But I say to you, my friends, Fear not them that kill the body, and after that can do no more: (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But I say to you my friends, Be not afraid of those who may kill the body, but after that, have nothing farther which they can do. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And I say to you, my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] But I charge you, my friends, fear not them who kill the body, and after that can do no more; (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But I say to you, my beloved ones, Fear not them who kill the body, and who afterward can do nothing more; ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And I tell you, my friends, fear not those that kill the body, and after this have [power] to do nothing more. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] I say and to you the friends of me: Not you be afraid of those killing the body, and after these not having more anything to have done. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And I say to you, my friends, be not afraid of those who kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And I say to you my friends, Fear not those who kill the body, and after this can do nothing more. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them which kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But I say to you, my friends, Fear not those who kill the body and after this have no more that they can do. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `And I say to you, my friends, be not afraid of those killing the body, and after these things are not having anything over to do; ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I say unto you, my friends––Do not be put in fear of them who kill the body, and, after these things, have nothing more uncommon which they can do. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I say unto you, my friends, Be not afraid of those killing the body, and after these things, having nothing more to do. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] "And I say to you, my friends, be not frightened by those who kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do; (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] To you who are my friends I say, Do not be afraid of those who kill the body, but after that can do no more. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "But to you who are my friends I say, "'Be not afraid of those who kill the body and after that can do nothing further. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But I say to you, my friends, be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after this have no more that they can do. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> ولكن اقول لكم يا احبائي لا تخافوا من الذين يقتلون الجسد وبعد ذلك ليس لهم ما يفعلون اكثر. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Eta diotsuet çuey neure adisquideoy, Etzaretela beldur gorputza hiltzen dutenén, eta guero ezpaitute cer guehiagoric eguin deçaten.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:4) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:4 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Mais je vous dis à vous, mes amis: Ne craignez pas ceux qui tuent le corps et qui apres cela ne peuvent rien faire de plus; (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et je vous dis à vous mes amis : ne craignez point ceux qui tuent le corps, et qui après cela ne sauraient rien faire davantage. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Ich sage euch aber, meinen Freunden: Fürchtet euch nicht vor denen die den Leib töten, und darnach nichts mehr tun können. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] OR a voi, miei amici, dico: Non temiate di coloro che uccidono il corpo, e, dopo ciò, non possono far altro di più. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Ma a voi che siete miei amici, io dico: Non temete coloro che uccidono il corpo, e che dopo ciò, non possono far nulla di più; (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* dico autem vobis amicis meis ne terreamini ab his qui occidunt corpus et post haec non habent amplius quod faciant [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Говорю же вам, друзьям Моим: не бойтесь убивающих тело и потом не могущих ничего более сделать; [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:4 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Nawaambieni ninyi rafiki zangu: msiwaogope wale wanaoua mwili, wasiweze kufanya kitu kingine zaidi.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men jag säger eder, mina vänner: Frukten icke för dem som väl kunna dräpa kroppen, men sedan icke hava makt att göra något mer. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinasabi ko sa inyo mga kaibigan ko, Huwag kayong mangatakot sa mga pumapatay ng katawan, na pagkatapos niyan ay wala na silang magagawa. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ta nói cùng các ngươi, là bạn hữu ta: Ðừng sợ kẻ giết xác rồi sau không làm gì được nữa. (Lu-ca 12:4 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:4 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:4

2018-12-04T17:36:54Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:4}}
* '''[[Luke 12:4 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:4]]''' [[3004|λέγω]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[5213|ὑμῖν]] [[3588|τοῖς]] [[5384|φίλοις]] [[3450|μου]], [[3361|Μὴ]] [[5399|φοβηθῆτε]] [[575|ἀπὸ]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[615|ἀποκτεινόντων]] [[3588|τὸ]] [[4983|σῶμα]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[3326|μετὰ]] [[5023|ταῦτα]] [[3361|μὴ]] [[2192|ἐχόντων]] [[4053|περισσότερόν]] [[5100|τι]] [[4160|ποιῆσαι]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:4''' And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:4 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:4]]''' “And I say to you, My friends, do not be afraid of those who kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:4 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:4 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And Y seie to you, my freendis, be ye not a ferd of hem that sleen the bodie, and aftir these thingis han no more what thei schulen do. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] I saye vnto you my fredes: Be not afrayde of them that kyll the body and after that have no moare that they can do. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But I saye vnto you my frendes: Be not afrayed of them that kyll the body, and after that haue nomore that they can do. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] I saye vnto you my frendes: be not afrayde of them that kyll the body, and after that haue no moare, that they can do. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] I saye vnto you my frendes: Be not afrayde of them that kyll the bodye, and after that haue no more that they can do. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] And I say vnto you my friendes, be not afrayde of them that kyll the body, and after that, haue no more that they can do. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] And I say vnto you, my friendes, be not afraide of them that kill the bodie, and after that are not able to doe any more. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] And I say vnto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that, haue no more that they can doe. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] As for you, my friends, be not afraid of those, who can kill the body, and after that can effect nothing more. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] And I say unto you, my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, but are not able to kill the soul, and have not any more that they can do. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Now I say unto you, my friends, Be not afraid of them, that can only kill the body, and after that have nothing more that they can do. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] But I say to you, my friends, Fear not them that kill the body, and after that can do no more: (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] But I say to you my friends, Be not afraid of those who may kill the body, but after that, have nothing farther which they can do. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] And I say to you, my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] But I charge you, my friends, fear not them who kill the body, and after that can do no more; (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] But I say to you, my beloved ones, Fear not them who kill the body, and who afterward can do nothing more; ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] And I tell you, my friends, fear not those that kill the body, and after this have [power] to do nothing more. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] I say and to you the friends of me: Not you be afraid of those killing the body, and after these not having more anything to have done. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] And I say to you, my friends, be not afraid of those who kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] And I say to you my friends, Fear not those who kill the body, and after this can do nothing more. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them which kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] But I say to you, my friends, Fear not those who kill the body and after this have no more that they can do. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `And I say to you, my friends, be not afraid of those killing the body, and after these things are not having anything over to do; ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I say unto you, my friends––Do not be put in fear of them who kill the body, and, after these things, have nothing more uncommon which they can do. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] And I say unto you, my friends, Be not afraid of those killing the body, and after these things, having nothing more to do. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] "And I say to you, my friends, be not frightened by those who kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do; (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] To you who are my friends I say, Do not be afraid of those who kill the body, but after that can do no more. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "But to you who are my friends I say, "'Be not afraid of those who kill the body and after that can do nothing further. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But I say to you, my friends, be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after this have no more that they can do. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* ولكن اقول لكم يا احبائي لا تخافوا من الذين يقتلون الجسد وبعد ذلك ليس لهم ما يفعلون اكثر. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Eta diotsuet çuey neure adisquideoy, Etzaretela beldur gorputza hiltzen dutenén, eta guero ezpaitute cer guehiagoric eguin deçaten.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 我的朋友，我对你们说，那杀身体以後不能再作甚麽的，不要怕他们。 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 我的朋友，我對你們說，那殺身體以後不能再作甚麼的，不要怕他們。 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Mais je vous dis à vous, mes amis: Ne craignez pas ceux qui tuent le corps et qui apres cela ne peuvent rien faire de plus; (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Et je vous dis à vous mes amis : ne craignez point ceux qui tuent le corps, et qui après cela ne sauraient rien faire davantage. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Ich sage euch aber, meinen Freunden: Fürchtet euch nicht vor denen die den Leib töten, und darnach nichts mehr tun können. (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] OR a voi, miei amici, dico: Non temiate di coloro che uccidono il corpo, e, dopo ciò, non possono far altro di più. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Ma a voi che siete miei amici, io dico: Non temete coloro che uccidono il corpo, e che dopo ciò, non possono far nulla di più; (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* dico autem vobis amicis meis ne terreamini ab his qui occidunt corpus et post haec non habent amplius quod faciant [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] Говорю же вам, друзьям Моим: не бойтесь убивающих тело и потом не могущих ничего более сделать; [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Men jag säger eder, mina vänner: Frukten icke för dem som väl kunna dräpa kroppen, men sedan icke hava makt att göra något mer. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] At sinasabi ko sa inyo mga kaibigan ko, Huwag kayong mangatakot sa mga pumapatay ng katawan, na pagkatapos niyan ay wala na silang magagawa. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ta nói cùng các ngươi, là bạn hữu ta: Ðừng sợ kẻ giết xác rồi sau không làm gì được nữa. (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:4 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:3

2018-12-04T17:36:25Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:3}}
* '''[[Luke 12:3 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:3]]''' [[473|ἀνθ’]] [[3739|ὧν]] [[3745|ὅσα]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[3588|τῇ]] [[4653|σκοτίᾳ]] [[2036|εἴπατε]], [[1722|ἐν]] [[3588|τῷ]] [[5457|φωτὶ]] [[191|ἀκουσθήσεται]]· [[2532|καὶ]] [[3739|ὃ]] [[4314|πρὸς]] [[3588|τὸ]] [[3775|οὖς]] [[2980|ἐλαλήσατε]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[3588|τοῖς]] [[5009|ταμείοις]], [[2784|κηρυχθήσεται]] [[1909|ἐπὶ]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[1430|δωμάτων]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:3''' Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light; and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed upon the housetops.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:3 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:3]]''' Therefore whatever you have spoken in the dark will be heard in the light, and what you have spoken in the ear in inner rooms will be proclaimed upon the housetops.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:3 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:3 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] For whi tho thingis that ye han seid in derknessis, schulen be seid in liyt; and that that ye han spokun in eere in the couchis, schal be prechid in roofes. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] For whatsoever ye have spoken in in darknes: that same shalbe hearde in light. And that which ye have spoken in the the eare eve in secret places shalbe preached even on the toppe of the housses. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Therfore whatsoeuer ye haue spoke in darknesse, that same shal be herde in light: and that ye haue spoken in to the eare in the chabers, shalbe preached vpon the house toppes. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] For what thinges ye haue spoken in darknes, shalbe hearde in the light. And that which ye haue spoken into the eare, euen in secrete places, shalbe preached on the toppe of the houses. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] For whatsoeuer ye haue spoken in darknes: that same shall be hearde in lyghte. And that whiche ye haue spoken in the eare, euen in secrete places, shall be preached euen on the toppe of the housses. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Therfore, whatsoeuer you haue spoken in darkenesse, shalbe hearde in the light: and that which ye haue spoken in the eare, euen in secrete places, shalbe preached on the toppe of the houses. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Wherefore whatsoeuer yee haue spoken in darkenesse, it shall be heard in the light: and that which ye haue spoken in the eare, in secret places, shall be preached on the houses. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] Therefore, whatsoeuer yee haue spoken in darkenesse, shall bee heard in the light: and that which yee haue spoken in the eare, in closets, shal be proclaimed vpon the house tops. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] whatever you have utter'd in the dark, shall be brought to light: and what you have whisper'd in a closet, shall be proclaim'd upon the house top. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness, shall be heard in the light: and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets, shall be proclaimed upon the house tops. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light; and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Therefore whatsoever ye have said in darkness shall be heard in the light: and what ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed on the house-tops. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] So that whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light, and what ye have whispered in closets shall be proclaimed on the house tops. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Wherefore whatsoever things ye have spoken in darkness, they shall be reported in the light; and what ye have whispered into the ear in the closets, shall be proclaimed on the house-tops. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] Therefore, whatever ye have spoken in darkness, shall be heard in the light; and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets, shall be proclaimed upon the house-tops. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] What you have spoken in the dark, shall be reported in the light; what you have whispered in the closet, shall be proclaimed from the housetop. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] For all that you say in darknesses in the light shall be heard, and what you whisper in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed on the housetops. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Whatever, therefore, you have said in the darkness, shall be heard in the light; and what you have spoken to the ear in private rooms, shall be proclaimed on the houses. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] On which account what in the dark you speak, in the light shall be heard; and what to the ear you spoke in the closets, shall be published on the house-tops. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Wherefore, whatever ye said in the darkness, shall be heard in the light; and what ye spoke in the ear in closets, shall be proclaimed on the house-tops. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Therefore, whatever ye have said in darkness, will be heard in the light; and what ye have spoken in the ear in closets, will be proclaimed upon the house–tops. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light; and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] Wherefore whatsoever ye have said in the darkness shall be heard in the light; and what ye have spoken in the ear in the inner chambers shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] therefore whatever ye have said in the darkness shall be heard in the light, and what ye have spoken in the ear in chambers shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] because whatever in the darkness ye said, in the light shall be heard: and what to the ear ye spake in the inner-chambers, shall be proclaimed upon the house-tops. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] Wherefore whatsoever ye have said in the darkness shall be heard in the light; and what ye have spoken in the ear in the inner chambers shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Because, as many things as, in the darkness, ye have said, in the light, shall be heard; and, what to the ear ye spake, in the chambers, shall be proclaimed on the housetops. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Therefore so many things as you spoke in the darkness shall be heard in the light; and whatsoever you spoke in the ear in the secret chambers shall be proclaimed upon the houses. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Wherefore, whatsoever ye said in the darkness shall be heard in the light; and what ye spake in the ear in the inner chambers shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Hence all that you have said in the dark will be heard in the light, and what you have spoken in the ear, within closed doors, will be proclaimed upon the house-tops. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Whatever therefore you have said in the dark, will be heard in the light; and what you have whispered within closed doors will be proclaimed from the house-tops. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] Wherefore, whatever things you have said in darkness, shall be heard in the light, and what you have spoken in the ear in closets, shall be proclaimed on the housetops. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> لذلك كل ما قلتموه في الظلمة يسمع في النور وما كلمتم به الاذن في المخادع ينادى به على السطوح. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Halacotz ilhumbean erran dituçuen gauçác, arguian ençunen dirade: eta beharrira gamberetan erran duçuena, predicaturen da etche gainetan.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:3) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:3 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* C'est pourquoi toutes les choses que vous avez dites dans les tenebres seront entendues dans la lumiere, et ce dont vous avez parle à l'oreille dans les chambres sera publie sur les toits. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] C'est pourquoi les choses que vous avez dites dans les ténèbres, seront ouïes dans la lumière; et ce dont vous avez parlé à l'oreille dans les chambres, sera prêché sur les maisons. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Darum, was ihr in der Finsternis saget, das wird man im Licht hören; was ihr redet ins Ohr in den Kammern, das wird man auf den Dächern predigen. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Perciò, tutte le cose che avete dette nelle tenebre saranno udite alla luce; e ciò che avete detto all’orecchio nelle camerette sarà predicato sopra i tetti delle case. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Perciò tutto quel che avete detto nelle tenebre, sarà udito nella luce; e quel che avete detto all’orecchio nelle stanze interne, sarà proclamato sui tetti. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* quoniam quae in tenebris dixistis in lumine dicentur et quod in aurem locuti estis in cubiculis praedicabitur in tectis [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Посему, что вы сказали в темноте, то услышится во свете; и что говорили на ухо внутри дома, то будет провозглашено на кровлях. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:3 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Kwa hiyo, kila mliyosema gizani, watu watayasikia katika mwanga, na kila mliyonong'ona faraghani milango imefungwa, yatatangazwa juu ya nyumba.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Därför skall allt vad I haven sagt i mörkret bliva hört i ljuset, och vad I haven viskat i någons öra i kammaren, det skall bliva utropat på taken. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Kaya nga, ang anomang sinabi ninyo sa kadiliman ay maririnig sa kaliwanagan, at ang sinalita ninyo sa bulong sa mga silid, ay ipagsisigawan sa mga bubungan. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Vậy nên mọi điều mà các ngươi đã nói nơi tối, sẽ nghe ra nơi sáng; mọi điều mà các ngươi đã nói vào lỗ tai trong buồng kín, sẽ giảng ra trên mái nhà. (Lu-ca 12:3 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:3 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:3

2018-12-04T17:36:16Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:3}}
* '''[[Luke 12:3 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:3]]''' [[473|ἀνθ’]] [[3739|ὧν]] [[3745|ὅσα]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[3588|τῇ]] [[4653|σκοτίᾳ]] [[2036|εἴπατε]], [[1722|ἐν]] [[3588|τῷ]] [[5457|φωτὶ]] [[191|ἀκουσθήσεται]]· [[2532|καὶ]] [[3739|ὃ]] [[4314|πρὸς]] [[3588|τὸ]] [[3775|οὖς]] [[2980|ἐλαλήσατε]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[3588|τοῖς]] [[5009|ταμείοις]], [[2784|κηρυχθήσεται]] [[1909|ἐπὶ]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[1430|δωμάτων]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:3''' Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light; and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed upon the housetops.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:3 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:3]]''' Therefore whatever you have spoken in the dark will be heard in the light, and what you have spoken in the ear in inner rooms will be proclaimed upon the housetops.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:3 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:3 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] For whi tho thingis that ye han seid in derknessis, schulen be seid in liyt; and that that ye han spokun in eere in the couchis, schal be prechid in roofes. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] For whatsoever ye have spoken in in darknes: that same shalbe hearde in light. And that which ye have spoken in the the eare eve in secret places shalbe preached even on the toppe of the housses. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Therfore whatsoeuer ye haue spoke in darknesse, that same shal be herde in light: and that ye haue spoken in to the eare in the chabers, shalbe preached vpon the house toppes. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] For what thinges ye haue spoken in darknes, shalbe hearde in the light. And that which ye haue spoken into the eare, euen in secrete places, shalbe preached on the toppe of the houses. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] For whatsoeuer ye haue spoken in darknes: that same shall be hearde in lyghte. And that whiche ye haue spoken in the eare, euen in secrete places, shall be preached euen on the toppe of the housses. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Therfore, whatsoeuer you haue spoken in darkenesse, shalbe hearde in the light: and that which ye haue spoken in the eare, euen in secrete places, shalbe preached on the toppe of the houses. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Wherefore whatsoeuer yee haue spoken in darkenesse, it shall be heard in the light: and that which ye haue spoken in the eare, in secret places, shall be preached on the houses. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] Therefore, whatsoeuer yee haue spoken in darkenesse, shall bee heard in the light: and that which yee haue spoken in the eare, in closets, shal be proclaimed vpon the house tops. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] whatever you have utter'd in the dark, shall be brought to light: and what you have whisper'd in a closet, shall be proclaim'd upon the house top. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness, shall be heard in the light: and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets, shall be proclaimed upon the house tops. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light; and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Therefore whatsoever ye have said in darkness shall be heard in the light: and what ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed on the house-tops. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] So that whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light, and what ye have whispered in closets shall be proclaimed on the house tops. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Wherefore whatsoever things ye have spoken in darkness, they shall be reported in the light; and what ye have whispered into the ear in the closets, shall be proclaimed on the house-tops. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] Therefore, whatever ye have spoken in darkness, shall be heard in the light; and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets, shall be proclaimed upon the house-tops. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] What you have spoken in the dark, shall be reported in the light; what you have whispered in the closet, shall be proclaimed from the housetop. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] For all that you say in darknesses in the light shall be heard, and what you whisper in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed on the housetops. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Whatever, therefore, you have said in the darkness, shall be heard in the light; and what you have spoken to the ear in private rooms, shall be proclaimed on the houses. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] On which account what in the dark you speak, in the light shall be heard; and what to the ear you spoke in the closets, shall be published on the house-tops. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Wherefore, whatever ye said in the darkness, shall be heard in the light; and what ye spoke in the ear in closets, shall be proclaimed on the house-tops. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Therefore, whatever ye have said in darkness, will be heard in the light; and what ye have spoken in the ear in closets, will be proclaimed upon the house–tops. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light; and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] Wherefore whatsoever ye have said in the darkness shall be heard in the light; and what ye have spoken in the ear in the inner chambers shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] therefore whatever ye have said in the darkness shall be heard in the light, and what ye have spoken in the ear in chambers shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] because whatever in the darkness ye said, in the light shall be heard: and what to the ear ye spake in the inner-chambers, shall be proclaimed upon the house-tops. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] Wherefore whatsoever ye have said in the darkness shall be heard in the light; and what ye have spoken in the ear in the inner chambers shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Because, as many things as, in the darkness, ye have said, in the light, shall be heard; and, what to the ear ye spake, in the chambers, shall be proclaimed on the housetops. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Therefore so many things as you spoke in the darkness shall be heard in the light; and whatsoever you spoke in the ear in the secret chambers shall be proclaimed upon the houses. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Wherefore, whatsoever ye said in the darkness shall be heard in the light; and what ye spake in the ear in the inner chambers shall be proclaimed upon the housetops. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Hence all that you have said in the dark will be heard in the light, and what you have spoken in the ear, within closed doors, will be proclaimed upon the house-tops. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Whatever therefore you have said in the dark, will be heard in the light; and what you have whispered within closed doors will be proclaimed from the house-tops. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] Wherefore, whatever things you have said in darkness, shall be heard in the light, and what you have spoken in the ear in closets, shall be proclaimed on the housetops. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* لذلك كل ما قلتموه في الظلمة يسمع في النور وما كلمتم به الاذن في المخادع ينادى به على السطوح. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Halacotz ilhumbean erran dituçuen gauçác, arguian ençunen dirade: eta beharrira gamberetan erran duçuena, predicaturen da etche gainetan.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 因此，你们在暗中所说的，将要在明处被人听见；在内室附耳所说的，将要在房上被人宣扬。 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 因此，你們在暗中所說的，將要在明處被人聽見；在內室附耳所說的，將要在房上被人宣揚。 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* C'est pourquoi toutes les choses que vous avez dites dans les tenebres seront entendues dans la lumiere, et ce dont vous avez parle à l'oreille dans les chambres sera publie sur les toits. (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] C'est pourquoi les choses que vous avez dites dans les ténèbres, seront ouïes dans la lumière; et ce dont vous avez parlé à l'oreille dans les chambres, sera prêché sur les maisons. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Darum, was ihr in der Finsternis saget, das wird man im Licht hören; was ihr redet ins Ohr in den Kammern, das wird man auf den Dächern predigen. (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Perciò, tutte le cose che avete dette nelle tenebre saranno udite alla luce; e ciò che avete detto all’orecchio nelle camerette sarà predicato sopra i tetti delle case. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Perciò tutto quel che avete detto nelle tenebre, sarà udito nella luce; e quel che avete detto all’orecchio nelle stanze interne, sarà proclamato sui tetti. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* quoniam quae in tenebris dixistis in lumine dicentur et quod in aurem locuti estis in cubiculis praedicabitur in tectis [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] Посему, что вы сказали в темноте, то услышится во свете; и что говорили на ухо внутри дома, то будет провозглашено на кровлях. [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Därför skall allt vad I haven sagt i mörkret bliva hört i ljuset, och vad I haven viskat i någons öra i kammaren, det skall bliva utropat på taken. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] Kaya nga, ang anomang sinabi ninyo sa kadiliman ay maririnig sa kaliwanagan, at ang sinalita ninyo sa bulong sa mga silid, ay ipagsisigawan sa mga bubungan. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Vậy nên mọi điều mà các ngươi đã nói nơi tối, sẽ nghe ra nơi sáng; mọi điều mà các ngươi đã nói vào lỗ tai trong buồng kín, sẽ giảng ra trên mái nhà. (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:3 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:2

2018-12-04T17:35:55Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Template:Verses in Luke 12:2}}
* '''[[Luke 12:2 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:2]]''' [[3762|οὐδὲν]] [[1161|δὲ]] [[4780|συγκεκαλυμμένον]] [[2076|ἐστίν]], [[3739|ὃ]] [[3756|οὐκ]] [[601|ἀποκαλυφθήσεται]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[2927|κρυπτόν]], [[3739|ὃ]] [[3756|οὐ]] [[1097|γνωσθήσεται]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:2''' For there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealed; neither hid, that shall not be known.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:2 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:2]]''' Because, there is nothing covered that will not be revealed, nor hidden that will not be known.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:2 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:2 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] For no thing is hilid, that schal not be schewid; nether hid, that schal not be wist. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] For ther is no thinge covered that shall not be vncovered: nether hyd that shall not be knowen. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] But there is nothinge hyd, that shal not be discouered: nether secrete, that shal not be knowne. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] For ther is nothynge couered, that shall not be vncouered: nether hyd, that shall not be knowen. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] For there is nothynge couered þe shall not be vncouered: neyther hydde, that shall not be knowen. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] For there is nothyng couered, that shall not be vncouered, neither hyd, that shall not be knowen. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] For there is nothing couered, that shall not bee reueiled: neither hidde, that shall not be knowen. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] For there is nothing couered, that shall not be reuealed, neither hid, that shall not be knowen. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] for there is nothing conceal'd, which shall not be disclos'd; nothing secret, which shall not be made publick. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] For there is nothing covered, that they shall not be made manifest; neither hid, that shall not be known. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] For there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealed; neither hid, that shall not be known. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] which shall not be discovered; nor hidden which shall not be known. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] For there is nothing covered that shall not be uncovered, neither hid, that shall not be made known: (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] For there is nothing concealed, that shall not be laid open; nor hid, which shall not be known. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] For there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealed; neither hid, that shall not be known. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] For there is nothing covered that shall not be detected: nothing secret that shall not be made known. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] For nothing is hidden which shall not be revealed, and nothing secreted which shall not be made known. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] for there is nothing concealed that shall not be revealed, nor hid that shall not be known. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Nothing and having been covered is, which not shall be uncovered; and secret, which not shall be known. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] For there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealed, nor hidden, that shall not be known. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] But there is nothing covered, that will not be revealed; and hid, that will not be known. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] For there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealed; neither hid, that shall not be known. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] But there is nothing covered up, that shall not be revealed: and hid, that shall not be known. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] but there is nothing covered up which shall not be revealed, nor secret that shall not be known; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] and there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealed; and hid, that shall not be known; ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] But there is nothing covered up, that shall not be revealed; and hid, that shall not be known. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But, nothing, hath been, covered up, which shall not be uncovered, and hidden, which shall not be made known. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] But there is nothing hidden, which shall not be revealed: and concealed, that shall not be made known. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But nothing has been covered up, that shall not be revealed; and hid, that shall not be known. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] There is nothing, however covered up, which will not be uncovered, nor anything kept secret which will not become known. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] There is nothing that is covered up which will not be uncovered, nor hidden which will not become known. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] But nothing is concealed which shall not be revealed, and hid which shall not be made known. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> فليس مكتوم لن يستعلن ولا خفي لن يعرف. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Ecen ezta deus estaliric aguerturen eztenic: ezeta deus secreturic iaquinen eztenic.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:2) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:2 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Mais il n'y a rien de couvert qui ne sera revele, ni rien de secret qui ne sera connu. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Car il n'y a rien de caché, qui ne doive être révélé; ni rien de [si] secret, qui ne doive être connu. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Es ist aber nichts verborgen, das nicht offenbar werde, noch heimlich, das man nicht wissen werde. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Or niente è coperto, che non abbia a scoprirsi; nè occulto, che non abbia a venire a notizia. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Ma non v’è niente di coperto che non abbia ad essere scoperto, né di occulto che non abbia ad esser conosciuto. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* nihil autem opertum est quod non reveletur neque absconditum quod non sciatur [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Нет ничего сокровенного, что не открылось бы, и тайного, чего не узнали бы. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:2 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Kila kilichofunikwa kitafunuliwa, kila kilichofichika kitafichuliwa.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Intet är förborgat, som icke skall bliva uppenbarat, och intet är fördolt, som icke skall bliva känt. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Datapuwa't walang bagay na natatakpan, na hindi mahahayag: at natatago, na hindi malalaman. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Chẳng có sự gì giấu mà không phải lộ ra, chẳng có sự gì kín mà không được biết. (Lu-ca 12:2 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12: Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:2

2018-12-04T17:35:42Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

Luke 12:1

2018-12-04T17:35:24Z

Beza 1598: /* Foreign Language Versions */

{{Verses in Luke 12}}
* '''[[Luke 12:1 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:1]]''' [[1722|Ἐν]] [[33739|οἷς]] [[1996|ἐπισυναχθεισῶν]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[3461|μυριάδων]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[3793|ὄχλου]], [[5620|ὥστε]] [[2662|καταπατεῖν]] [[240|ἀλλήλους]], [[756|ἤρξατο]] [[3004|λέγειν]] [[4314|πρὸς]] [[3588|τοὺς]] [[3101|μαθητὰς]] [[846|αὐτοῦ]] [[4412|πρῶτον]], [[4337|Προσέχετε]] [[1438|ἑαυτοῖς]] [[575|ἀπὸ]] [[3588|τῆς]] [[2219|ζύμης]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[5330|Φαρισαίων]], [[3748|ἥτις]] [[2076|ἐστὶν]] [[5272|ὑπόκρισις]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:1''' In the mean time, when there were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, insomuch that they trode one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:1 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:1]]''' In the meantime, when an innumerable multitude of people had gathered together, so that they trampled one another, He began to say to His disciples first of all, “Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:1 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:1 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And whanne myche puple stood aboute, so that thei treden ech on othir, he bigan to seie to hise disciplis, Be ye war of the sourdouy of the Farisees, that is ypocrisie. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] As ther gadered together an innumerable multitude of people (in so moche that they trood one another) he began to saye vnto his disciples: Fyrst of all beware of the leve of the Pharises which is ypocrisy. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] There were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, in so moch that they trode one another: Then beganne he, and sayde first vnto his disciples: Bewarre of the leuen of the Pharises, which is ypocrisye. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] As ther gathered together an innumerable multitude of people (in so moche that they trood one another) he began to saye vnto his disciples: fyrst of all be warre of the leuen of the Pharises which is ypocrisy. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] As there gathered together an innumerable multitude of people (in so muche that they trode one another) he began to saye vnto hys discyples: Fyrste of all beware of the leuen of the Phariseis, which is hypocrisye. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] In ye meane tyme, whe ther were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people [insomuch] that they trode one another, he began to saye vnto his disciples. First of all, beware of the leuen of the pharisees, which is hypocrisie. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] In the meane time, there gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, so that they trode one another: and he began to say vnto his disciples first, Take heede to your selues of the leauen of the Pharises, which is hypocrisie. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] In the meane time, when there were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, insomuch that they trode one vpon another, he began to say vnto his disciples first of all, Beware yee of the leauen of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisie. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] In the mean time thousands of people being gather'd about him, so as to trample upon one another, he first address'd himself thus to his disciples, beware of the corrupt doctrine of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] But as many people encompassed him round about, insomuch that they crouded one upon another, he began to say unto the disciples, First of all beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisie. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] In the mean time, when there were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, insomuch that they trode one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] In the mean time great multitudes of people being gathered together about Him, so that they trode upon one another, He began to say to his disciples, Beware of the leaven of the pharisees, which is hypocrisy: for there is nothing concealed, (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] In the meantime, an innumerable multitude being gathered together, so that they trod one on upon the other, he said to his disciples first, Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] MEANTIME myriads of people collecting, so that they trod on one another, he began to speak to his disciples, Take heed principally of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] In the mean time, when there was gathered an innumerable multitude of people, so that they trod one upon another, he began to say to his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Meantime, while the crowd, in myriads flocked about him, so that they trod one upon another, he said, addressing himself to his disciples, Above all things, beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] AND when (there) had gathered (by) myriads great assemblies, so that they would have trodden upon one another, Jeshu began to say to his disciples, Beware for yourselves before all things of the leaven of the Pharishee, which is hypocrisy. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] AT that time, the multitude being assembled by ten thousands, so that they trod one on another, he said to his disciples, Beware, first, of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] In those having been assembled of the myriads of the crowd, so as to tread upon one another, he began to say to the disciples of himself: First take heed to yourselves of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] IN the mean time, the multitude having gathered together in tens of thousands, so that they trod one upon another, he began first to say to his disciples: Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] In the mean time, when the multitude was gathered together in myriads, so that they trod one upon another, he began to say to his disciples first, Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] In the mean time, when there were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, insomuch that they trode one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] In the mean time, when the many thousands of the multitude were gathered together, insomuch that they trode one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] In those [times], the myriads of the crowd being gathered together, so that they trod one on another, he began to say to his disciples first, Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] At which time the myriads of the multitude having been gathered together, so as to tread upon one another, he began to say unto his disciples, first, `Take heed to yourselves of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy; ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] In the mean time, when the many thousands of the multitude were gathered together, insomuch that they trod one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Amongst which things, when the ten thousands of the multitude were gathered together, so that they were treading one upon another, he began to be saying, unto his disciples, first––Be keeping yourselves free from the leaven of the Pharisees, the which is, hypocrisy. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] In the meantime, myriads of the multitude having gathered together, So that they trode on one another, He began to speak to His disciples first; Take heed unto yourselves from the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] In the meantime, the vast multitude having been gathered together, so as to tread one upon another, He began to say to His disciples, first, "Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Meanwhile the people had gathered in thousands, so that they trod upon one another, when Jesus, addressing himself to his disciples, began by saying to them: "Be on your guard against the leaven—that is, the hypocrisy—of the Pharisees. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Meanwhile the people had come streaming towards Him by tens of thousands, so that they were trampling one another under foot. And now He proceeded to say to His disciples first, "Beware of the yeast of the Pharisees, that is to say, beware of hypocrisy. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] In the meantime, when myriads of the multitude had come together, so that they trod one upon another, he began to say to his disciples first: Beware you of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* <big> وفي اثناء ذلك اذ اجتمع ربوات الشعب حتى كان بعضهم يدوس بعضا ابتدأ يقول لتلاميذه اولا تحرزوا لانفسكم من خمير الفريسيين الذي هو الرياء. </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Bizquitartean bildu içanic gendetze mulço handiac hambat non elkar aurizquiten baitzutén, has cequién erraiten bere discipuluey, Lehenic beguira çaitezte Phariseuén altchagarritic, cein baita hypocrisiá.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Лука 12:1) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 12:1 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Cependant les foules s'etant rassemblees par milliers, de sorte qu'ils se foulaient les uns les autres, il se mit, avant tout, à dire à ses disciples: Tenez-vous en garde contre le levain des pharisiens, qui est l'hypocrisie. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Cependant les troupes s'étant assemblées par milliers, en sorte qu'ils se foulaient les uns les autres, il se mit à dire à ses Disciples : donnez-vous garde surtout du levain des Pharisiens qui est l'hypocrisie. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Es lief das Volk zu und kamen etliche Tausend zusammen, also daß sie sich untereinander traten. Da fing er an und sagte zu seinen Jüngern: Zum ersten hütet euch vor dem Sauerteig der Pharisäer, welches ist die Heuchelei. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Intanto, essendosi raunata la moltitudine a migliaia, talchè si calpestavano gli uni gli altri, Gesù prese a dire a’ suoi discepoli: Guardatevi imprima dal lievito de’ Farisei, ch’è ipocrisia. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Intanto, essendosi la moltitudine radunata a migliaia, così da calpestarsi gli uni gli altri, Gesù cominciò prima di tutto a dire ai suoi discepoli: Guardatevi dal lievito de’ Farisei, che è ipocrisia. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* multis autem turbis circumstantibus ita ut se invicem conculcarent coepit dicere ad discipulos suos adtendite a fermento Pharisaeorum quae est hypocrisis [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Между тем, когда собрались тысячи народа, так что теснили друг друга, Он начал говорить сперва ученикамСвоим: берегитесь закваски фарисейской, которая есть лицемерие. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Lucas 12:1 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Wakati watu kwa maelfu walipokuwa wamekusanyika hata wakawa wanakanyagana, Yesu aliwaambia kwanza wanafunzi wake, "Jihadharini na chachu ya Mafarisayo, yaani unafiki.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Då nu otaligt mycket folk var församlat omkring honom, så att de trampade på varandra, tog han till orda och sade, närmast till sina lärjungar: »Tagen eder till vara för fariséernas surdeg, det är för skrymteri. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Samantalang nangagkakatipon ang libolibong tao, na ano pa't nagkakayapakan silasila, ay nagpasimula siyang magsalita muna sa kaniyang mga alagad, Mangagingat kayo sa lebadura ng mga Fariseo, na ito'y pagpapaimbabaw nga. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Khi ấy, dân chúng nhóm lại kể hàng ngàn người, đến nỗi giày đạp nhau, Ðức Chúa Jêsus mới trước hết phán cùng môn đồ rằng: Hãy giữ mình về men của người Pha-ri-si, là sự giả hình. (Lu-ca 12:1 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:1 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Luke 12:1

2018-12-04T17:35:08Z

Beza 1598: /* English Translations */

{{Verses in Luke 12}}
* '''[[Luke 12:1 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)| ΚΑΤΑ ΛΟΥΚΑΝ 12:1]]''' [[1722|Ἐν]] [[33739|οἷς]] [[1996|ἐπισυναχθεισῶν]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[3461|μυριάδων]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[3793|ὄχλου]], [[5620|ὥστε]] [[2662|καταπατεῖν]] [[240|ἀλλήλους]], [[756|ἤρξατο]] [[3004|λέγειν]] [[4314|πρὸς]] [[3588|τοὺς]] [[3101|μαθητὰς]] [[846|αὐτοῦ]] [[4412|πρῶτον]], [[4337|Προσέχετε]] [[1438|ἑαυτοῖς]] [[575|ἀπὸ]] [[3588|τῆς]] [[2219|ζύμης]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[5330|Φαρισαίων]], [[3748|ἥτις]] [[2076|ἐστὶν]] [[5272|ὑπόκρισις]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Luke 12:1''' In the mean time, when there were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, insomuch that they trode one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy.

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

*'''[[Luke 12:1 King James Version 2016|Luke 12:1]]''' In the meantime, when an innumerable multitude of people had gathered together, so that they trampled one another, He began to say to His disciples first of all, “Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy.

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] {{Template: Complutensian Polyglot Footer}}
''See Also [[Luke 12:1 Complutensian Polyglot 1514]]''

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Luke 12:1 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] And whanne myche puple stood aboute, so that thei treden ech on othir, he bigan to seie to hise disciplis, Be ye war of the sourdouy of the Farisees, that is ypocrisie. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] As ther gadered together an innumerable multitude of people (in so moche that they trood one another) he began to saye vnto his disciples: Fyrst of all beware of the leve of the Pharises which is ypocrisy. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] There were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, in so moch that they trode one another: Then beganne he, and sayde first vnto his disciples: Bewarre of the leuen of the Pharises, which is ypocrisye. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] As ther gathered together an innumerable multitude of people (in so moche that they trood one another) he began to saye vnto his disciples: fyrst of all be warre of the leuen of the Pharises which is ypocrisy. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] As there gathered together an innumerable multitude of people (in so muche that they trode one another) he began to saye vnto hys discyples: Fyrste of all beware of the leuen of the Phariseis, which is hypocrisye. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] In ye meane tyme, whe ther were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people [insomuch] that they trode one another, he began to saye vnto his disciples. First of all, beware of the leuen of the pharisees, which is hypocrisie. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] In the meane time, there gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, so that they trode one another: and he began to say vnto his disciples first, Take heede to your selues of the leauen of the Pharises, which is hypocrisie. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] In the meane time, when there were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, insomuch that they trode one vpon another, he began to say vnto his disciples first of all, Beware yee of the leauen of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisie. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] In the mean time thousands of people being gather'd about him, so as to trample upon one another, he first address'd himself thus to his disciples, beware of the corrupt doctrine of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] But as many people encompassed him round about, insomuch that they crouded one upon another, he began to say unto the disciples, First of all beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisie. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] In the mean time, when there were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, insomuch that they trode one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] In the mean time great multitudes of people being gathered together about Him, so that they trode upon one another, He began to say to his disciples, Beware of the leaven of the pharisees, which is hypocrisy: for there is nothing concealed, (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] In the meantime, an innumerable multitude being gathered together, so that they trod one on upon the other, he said to his disciples first, Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] MEANTIME myriads of people collecting, so that they trod on one another, he began to speak to his disciples, Take heed principally of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] In the mean time, when there was gathered an innumerable multitude of people, so that they trod one upon another, he began to say to his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Meantime, while the crowd, in myriads flocked about him, so that they trod one upon another, he said, addressing himself to his disciples, Above all things, beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] AND when (there) had gathered (by) myriads great assemblies, so that they would have trodden upon one another, Jeshu began to say to his disciples, Beware for yourselves before all things of the leaven of the Pharishee, which is hypocrisy. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] AT that time, the multitude being assembled by ten thousands, so that they trod one on another, he said to his disciples, Beware, first, of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] In those having been assembled of the myriads of the crowd, so as to tread upon one another, he began to say to the disciples of himself: First take heed to yourselves of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] IN the mean time, the multitude having gathered together in tens of thousands, so that they trod one upon another, he began first to say to his disciples: Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] In the mean time, when the multitude was gathered together in myriads, so that they trod one upon another, he began to say to his disciples first, Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] In the mean time, when there were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, insomuch that they trode one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] In the mean time, when the many thousands of the multitude were gathered together, insomuch that they trode one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] In those [times], the myriads of the crowd being gathered together, so that they trod one on another, he began to say to his disciples first, Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy; (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] At which time the myriads of the multitude having been gathered together, so as to tread upon one another, he began to say unto his disciples, first, `Take heed to yourselves of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy; ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] In the mean time, when the many thousands of the multitude were gathered together, insomuch that they trod one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Amongst which things, when the ten thousands of the multitude were gathered together, so that they were treading one upon another, he began to be saying, unto his disciples, first––Be keeping yourselves free from the leaven of the Pharisees, the which is, hypocrisy. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] In the meantime, myriads of the multitude having gathered together, So that they trode on one another, He began to speak to His disciples first; Take heed unto yourselves from the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] In the meantime, the vast multitude having been gathered together, so as to tread one upon another, He began to say to His disciples, first, "Beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Meanwhile the people had gathered in thousands, so that they trod upon one another, when Jesus, addressing himself to his disciples, began by saying to them: "Be on your guard against the leaven—that is, the hypocrisy—of the Pharisees. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Meanwhile the people had come streaming towards Him by tens of thousands, so that they were trampling one another under foot. And now He proceeded to say to His disciples first, "Beware of the yeast of the Pharisees, that is to say, beware of hypocrisy. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] In the meantime, when myriads of the multitude had come together, so that they trod one upon another, he began to say to his disciples first: Beware you of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

====[[Arabic]]====
* وفي اثناء ذلك اذ اجتمع ربوات الشعب حتى كان بعضهم يدوس بعضا ابتدأ يقول لتلاميذه اولا تحرزوا لانفسكم من خمير الفريسيين الذي هو الرياء. <big></big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)

====[[Aramaic]]====
* <big></big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====

* Bizquitartean bildu içanic gendetze mulço handiac hambat non elkar aurizquiten baitzutén, has cequién erraiten bere discipuluey, Lehenic beguira çaitezte Phariseuén altchagarritic, cein baita hypocrisiá.

====[[Bulgarian]]====

* [[1940 AD|1940]] (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Chinese]]====

* 1 这时，有几万人聚集，甚至彼此践踏。耶稣开讲，先对门徒说：你们要防备法利赛人的酵，就是假冒为善。 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))

* 1 這時，有幾萬人聚集，甚至彼此踐踏。耶穌開講，先對門徒說：你們要防備法利賽人的酵，就是假冒為善。 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))

====[[French]]====

* Cependant les foules s'etant rassemblees par milliers, de sorte qu'ils se foulaient les uns les autres, il se mit, avant tout, à dire à ses disciples: Tenez-vous en garde contre le levain des pharisiens, qui est l'hypocrisie. (French Darby)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] Cependant les troupes s'étant assemblées par milliers, en sorte qu'ils se foulaient les uns les autres, il se mit à dire à ses Disciples : donnez-vous garde surtout du levain des Pharisiens qui est l'hypocrisie. (Martin 1744)

* [[1744 AD|1744]] (Ostervald 1744)

====[[German]]====

* [[1545 AD|1545]] (Luther 1545)

* [[1871 AD|1871]] (Elberfelder 1871)

* [[1912 AD|1912]] Es lief das Volk zu und kamen etliche Tausend zusammen, also daß sie sich untereinander traten. Da fing er an und sagte zu seinen Jüngern: Zum ersten hütet euch vor dem Sauerteig der Pharisäer, welches ist die Heuchelei. (Luther 1912)

====[[Italian]]====

* [[1649 AD|1649]] Intanto, essendosi raunata la moltitudine a migliaia, talchè si calpestavano gli uni gli altri, Gesù prese a dire a’ suoi discepoli: Guardatevi imprima dal lievito de’ Farisei, ch’è ipocrisia. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)

* [[1927 AD|1927]] Intanto, essendosi la moltitudine radunata a migliaia, così da calpestarsi gli uni gli altri, Gesù cominciò prima di tutto a dire ai suoi discepoli: Guardatevi dal lievito de’ Farisei, che è ipocrisia. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====

* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Latin]]====

* multis autem turbis circumstantibus ita ut se invicem conculcarent coepit dicere ad discipulos suos adtendite a fermento Pharisaeorum quae est hypocrisis [[Latin Vulgate]]

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)

* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)

====[[Pidgin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna)

====[[Russian]]====

* [[1876 AD|1876]] Между тем, когда собрались тысячи народа, так что теснили друг друга, Он начал говорить сперва ученикамСвоим: берегитесь закваски фарисейской, которая есть лицемерие. [[Russian Synodal Version]]

Phonetically:

====[[Spanish]]====

* (RVG Spanish)

====[[Swedish]]====

* [[1917 AD|1917]] Då nu otaligt mycket folk var församlat omkring honom, så att de trampade på varandra, tog han till orda och sade, närmast till sina lärjungar: »Tagen eder till vara för fariséernas surdeg, det är för skrymteri. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====

* [[1905 AD|1905]] Samantalang nangagkakatipon ang libolibong tao, na ano pa't nagkakayapakan silasila, ay nagpasimula siyang magsalita muna sa kaniyang mga alagad, Mangagingat kayo sa lebadura ng mga Fariseo, na ito'y pagpapaimbabaw nga. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====[[Tok Pisin]]====

* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Tok Pisin King Jems)

====[[Vietnamese]]====

* [[1934 AD|1934]] Khi ấy, dân chúng nhóm lại kể hàng ngàn người, đến nỗi giày đạp nhau, Ðức Chúa Jêsus mới trước hết phán cùng môn đồ rằng: Hãy giữ mình về men của người Pha-ri-si, là sự giả hình. (VIET)

==See Also==
* [[Luke 12:1 Timeline]]

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Matthew 18:23

2018-11-24T11:31:17Z

Beza 1598: /* Romainian */

{{Verses in Matthew 18}}
* '''[[Matthew 18:23 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)|ΚΑΤΑ ΜΑΤΘΑΙΟΝ 18:23]]''' [[1223|διὰ]] [[5124|τοῦτο]] [[3666|ὡμοιώθη]] [[3588|ἡ]] [[932|βασιλεία]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[3772|οὐρανῶν]] [[444|ἀνθρώπῳ]] [[935|βασιλεῖ]], [[3739|ὃς]] [[2309|ἠθέλησε]] [[4868|συνᾶραι]] [[3056|λόγον]] [[3326|μετὰ]] [[3588|τῶν]] [[1401|δούλων]] [[846|αὐτοῦ]].

{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Matthew 18:23''' [[1223|Therefore]] [[3588|is the]] [[932|kingdom]] [[3772|of heaven]] [[3666|likened unto]] [[444|a certain]] [[935|king]], [[3739|which]] [[2309|would]] [[4868|take]] [[3056|account]] [[3326|of]] [[846|his]] [[1401|servants]].

{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

* '''[[Matthew 18:23 King James Version 2016|Matthew 18:23]]''' [[1223|Therefore]] [[3588|the]] [[932|kingdom]] [[3772|of heaven]] [[3588|is]] [[3666|like]] [[444|a certain]] [[935|king]] [[3739|who]] [[2309|wanted to]] [[4868|settle]] [[3056|accounts]] [[3326|with]] [[846|his]] [[1401|servants]].

{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}
==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] ([[Complutensian Polyglot]])

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Matthew 18:23 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] Therfor the kyngdom of heuenes is licned to a kyng, that wolde rekyn with hise seruauntis. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] Therfore is ye kingdome of heven lykened vnto a certayne kynge which wolde take a countis of his servauntis. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Therfore is ye kingdome of heaue lickened vnto a kynge which wolde reken wt his seruauntes. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] Therfore is the kyngdom of heauen lykened vnto a certaine man þt was a king, which wolde take acountes of hys seruauntes. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] Therefore is the kyngedom of heauen lykened vnto a certayne kyng, whithe woulde take a countes of hys seruauntes. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Therfore is the kyngdome of heauen, lykened vnto a certayne man, that was a kyng, which woulde take accomptes of his seruauntes. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Thereefore is the kingdome of heauen likened vnto a certaine King, which would take an account of his seruants. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] Therefore is the kingdome of heauen likened vnto a certaine king, which would take accompt of his seruants. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] In this respect the gospel-kingdom may be represented by that of a temporal prince, who had a mind to call his servants to account. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] Therefore the kingdom of heaven is likened unto a certain king, who would take account of his servants. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] Therefore is the kingdom of heaven likened unto a certain king, which would take account of his servants. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And therefore the gospel-kingdom is like unto a king, who had a mind to settle accounts with his servants: (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] Therefore the kingdom of heaven is like a king, who was minded to settle accounts with his servants. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Therefore is the kingdom of heaven like unto a certain king who purposed to settle his account with his servants. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] Therefore is the kingdom of heaven likened to a certain king who would take account of his servants. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] In this the Administration of Heaven resembles a king, who determined to settle accounts with his servants. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] THEREFORE is the kingdom of the heavens likened to a royal person who would take the account from his servants. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] On this account, the kingdom of heaven is like a king who wished to settle with his servants. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Therefore this has been compared the kingdom of the heavens to a man king, who wished to settle an account with the slaves of him. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Therefore is the kingdom of heaven likened to a certain king, who desired to make a reckoning with his servants. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Therefore the kingdom of heaven is likened to a king, who would settle accounts with his servants. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] Therefore is the kingdom of heaven likened unto a certain king, which would take account of his servants. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] Therefore is the kingdom of heaven likened unto a certain king, which would make a reckoning with his servants. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] For this cause the kingdom of the heavens has become like a king who would reckon with his bondmen. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `Because of this was the reign of the heavens likened to a man, a king, who did will to take reckoning with his servants, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] Therefore is the kingdom of heaven likened unto a certain king, who would make a reckoning with his servants. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] For this cause, hath the kingdom of the heavens become like unto a man, a king, who wished to settle an account with his servants; (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Therefore the kingdom of the heavens is like unto a kingly man, who wished to make a reckoning with his servants. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Therefore, the Kingdom of Heaven was likened to a king who wished to make a reckoning with his servants. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] And therefore the Kingdom of Heaven may be compared to a king who wished to settle accounts with his servants. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "For this reason the Kingdom of the Heavens may be compared to a king who determined to have a settlement of accounts with his servants. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] For this reason the kingdom of the heavens is likened to a man, a king, who wished to take up a settlement with his servants. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* لذلك يشبه ملكوت السموات انسانا ملكا اراد ان يحاسب عبيده. <big> </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* ܡܛܠ ܗܢܐ ܐܬܕܡܝܬ ܡܠܟܘܬܐ ܕܫܡܝܐ ܠܓܒܪܐ ܡܠܟܐ ܕܨܒܐ ܕܢܤܒ ܚܘܫܒܢܐ ܡܢ ܥܒܕܘܗܝ ܀ <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Halacotz da comparatu ceruètaco resumá beré cerbitzariequin contu eguin nahi vkan duen regue batequin.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] Затова небесното царство прилича на един цар, който поиска да прегледа сметките на слугите си. (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Матей 18:23) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 18:23 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* C'est pourquoi le royaume des cieux a été fait semblable à un roi qui voulut compter avec ses esclaves. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] C'est pourquoi le Royaume des cieux est semblable à un Roi qui voulut compter avec ses serviteurs. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] C'est pourquoi le royaume des cieux est semblable à un roi qui voulut compter avec ses serviteurs. (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] Darum ist das Himmelreich gleich einem Könige, der mit seinen Knechten rechnen wollte. (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] Deswegen ist das Reich der Himmel einem Könige gleich geworden, der mit seinen Knechten (O. Sklaven; so auch nachher) abrechnen wollte. (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Darum ist das Himmelreich gleich einem König, der mit seinen Knechten rechnen wollte. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Perciò, il regno de’ cieli è assomigliato ad un re, il qual volle far ragione co’ suoi servitori. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Perciò il regno de’ cieli è simile ad un re che volle fare i conti co’ suoi servitori. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* ideo adsimilatum est regnum caelorum homini regi qui voluit rationem ponere cum servis suis [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[2015 AD|2015]] De aceea împărăţia cerului seaseamănă cu un împărat care avoit să facă socoteala cu robii săi. ([[Fidela Bible|Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Посему Царство Небесное подобно царю, который захотел сосчитаться с рабами своими; [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Mateo 18:23 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Ndiyo maana Ufalme wa mbinguni umefanana na mfalme mmoja aliyeamua kukagua hesabu za watumishi wake.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Alltså är det med himmelriket, såsom när en konung ville hålla räkenskap med sina tjänare. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Kaya't ang kaharian ng langit ay tulad sa isang hari, na nagibig na makipagusap sa kaniyang mga alipin. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Vậy nên, nước thiên đàng giống như vua kia, muốn tính sổ với các đầy tớ mình. (Ma-thi-ô 18:23 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Matthew 18:22

2018-11-24T11:30:10Z

Beza 1598: /* Romainian */

{{Verses in Matthew 18}}
* '''[[Matthew 18:22 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)|ΚΑΤΑ ΜΑΤΘΑΙΟΝ 18:22]]''' [[3004|λέγει]] [[846|αὐτῷ]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[2424|Ἰησοῦς]], [[3956|Οὐ]] [[3004|λέγω]] [[4671|σοι]] [[2193|ἕως]] [[2034|ἑπτάκις]], [[235|ἀλλ]]’ [[2193|ἕως]] [[1441|ἑβδομηκοντάκις]] [[2033|ἑπτά]].
{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Matthew 18:22''' [[2424|Jesus]] [[3004|saith]] [[846|unto him]], [[3004|I say]] [[3756|not]] [[4671|unto thee]], [[2193|Until]] [[2034|seven times]]: [[2193|but, Until]] [[1441|seventy times]] [[2033|seven]].
{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

* '''[[Matthew 18:22 King James Version 2016|Matthew 18:22]]''' Jesus said to him, “I do not say to you, until seven times, but until seventy times seven.
{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] ([[Complutensian Polyglot]])

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Matthew 18:22 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] Whether til seuen tymes? Jhesus seith to hym, Y seie not to thee, til seuene sithis; but til seuenti sithis seuene sithis. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] Iesus sayd vnto him: I saye not vnto the seven tymes: but seventy tymes seven tymes. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Iesus saide vnto hi: I saye not vnto ye seue tymes, but seuetie tymes seuen tymes. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] Iesus sayeth vnto hym: I saye not vnto the vntill seuen tymes: but seuenty tymes seuen tymes. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] Iesus sayde vnto hym: I say not vnto the seuen times: but seuenty times seuen tymes. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Iesus sayth vnto hym, I say not vnto thee vntyll seuen tymes: but, vntyll seuentie tymes seuen. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Iesus said vnto him, I say not to thee, Vnto seuen times, but, Vnto seuentie times seuen times. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] Iesus saith vnto him, I say not vnto thee, Untill seuen times: but, Untill seuentie times seuen. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] Jesus answered, I tell thee not only seven: but seventy times seven. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] Jesus said unto him, I say not unto thee, Until seven times: but, until seventy times seven. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] Jesus saith unto him, I say not unto thee, Until seven times: but, Until seventy times seven. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Jesus answereth him, I tell thee not, to seven times, but to seventy times seven. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] till seven times? Jesus saith to him, I say not unto thee, Till seven times: but, Till seventy times seven. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Jesus saith to him, I tell thee not until seven times, but unto seventy times seven. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] Jesus saith to him, I say not to thee, Until seven times: but, Until seventy times seven. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Jesus answered, I say to you, not seven times, but seventy times seven times. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] Jeshu said to him, I say not to thee, Until seven, but, Until seventy times seven and seven. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Jesus said to him, I say not to you till seven times, but till seventy times seven. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Says to him the Jesus: Not I say to thee, till seven times, but till seventy times seven. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Jesus says to him: I say not to thee, until seven times, but until seventy times seven. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Jesus saith to him, I say not to thee, until seven times, but until seventy times seven. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] Jesus saith unto him, I say not unto thee, Until seven times: but, Until seventy times seven. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] Jesus saith unto him, I say not unto thee, Until seven times; but, Until seventy times seven. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] Jesus says to him, I say not to thee until seven times, but until seventy times seven. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] Jesus saith to him, `I do not say to thee till seven times, but till seventy times seven. ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] Jesus saith unto him, I say not unto thee, Until seven times; but, Until seventy times seven. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Jesus saith to him––I say not unto thee, unto, seven, times, but, until seventy times seven. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Jesus says to him, I say not unto thee, Until seven time; but Until seventy times seven. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Jesus saith to him, "I say not to you, 'till seven times,' but till seventy times seven. (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] But Jesus answered: "Not seven times, but 'seventy times seven.' (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] "I do not say seven times," answered Jesus, "but seventy times seven times. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] Jesus says to him: I say not to thee, till seven times, but till seventy times seven. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* قال له يسوع لا اقول لك الى سبع مرات بل الى سبعين مرة سبع مرات. <big> </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* ܐܡܪ ܠܗ ܝܫܘܥ ܠܐ ܐܡܪ ܐܢܐ ܠܟ ܥܕܡܐ ܠܫܒܥ ܐܠܐ ܥܕܡܐ ܠܫܒܥܝܢ ܙܒܢܝܢ ܫܒܥ ܫܒܥ ܀ <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Diotsó IESVSEC, Eztiossát çazpitarano, baina çazpitan hiruroguey eta hamarretarano.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] Исус му рече: Не ти казвам: До седем пъти- до седемдесет пъти по седем. (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Матей 18:22) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 18:22 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Jésus lui dit: Je ne te dis pas jusqu'à sept fois, mais jusqu'à soixante-dix fois sept fois. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Jésus lui répondit : je ne te dis pas jusqu'à sept fois, mais jusqu'à sept fois septante fois. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Sera-ce jusqu'à sept fois? Jésus lui répondit: Je ne te dis pas jusqu'à sept fois, mais jusqu'à septante fois sept fois. (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] Jesus sprach zu ihm: Ich sage dir, nicht siebenmal, sondern siebenzigmal siebenmal. (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] Jesus spricht zu ihm: Nicht sage ich dir, bis siebenmal, sondern bis siebzig mal sieben. (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Jesus sprach zu ihm: Ich sage dir: Nicht siebenmal, sondern siebzigmal siebenmal. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Gesù gli disse: Io non ti dico fino a sette volte, ma fino a settanta volte sette. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] E Gesù a lui: lo non ti dico fino a sette volte, ma fino a settanta volte sette. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* dicit illi Iesus non dico tibi usque septies sed usque septuagies septies [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[2015 AD|2015]] Isus i-a spus: Nu îţi spun pânăla şapte ori, ci până la şaptezecide ori câte şapte. ([[Fidela Bible|Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Иисус говорит ему: не говорю тебе: до семи раз, но до седмижды семидесяти раз. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Mateo 18:22 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Yesu akamjibu, "Sisemi mara saba tu, bali sabini mara saba.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Jesus svarade honom: »Jag säger dig: Icke sju gånger, utan sjuttio gånger sju gånger. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Sinabi sa kaniya ni Jesus, Hindi ko sinasabi sa iyo, Hanggang sa makapito; kundi, Hanggang sa makapitongpung pito. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Ngài đáp rằng: Ta không nói cùng ngươi rằng: đến bảy lần đâu, nhưng đến bảy mươi lần bảy. (Ma-thi-ô 18:22 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Matthew 18:21

2018-11-24T11:28:40Z

Beza 1598: /* Romainian */

{{Verses in Matthew 18}}
* '''[[Matthew 18:21 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)|ΚΑΤΑ ΜΑΤΘΑΙΟΝ 18:21]]''' [[5119|Τότε]] [[4334|προσελθὼν]] [[846|αὐτῷ]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[4074|Πέτρος]] [[2036|εἶπε]], [[2962|Κύριε]], [[4212|ποσάκις]] [[264|ἁμαρτήσει]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[1691|ἐμὲ]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[80|ἀδελφός]] [[3450|μου]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[863|ἀφήσω]] [[846|αὐτῷ]]; [[2193|ἕως]] [[2034|ἑπτάκις]];
{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Matthew 18:21''' [[5119|Then]] [[4334|came]] [[4074|Peter]] [[846|to him]], [[2036|and said]], [[2962|Lord]], [[4212|how oft]] [[3450|shall my]] [[80|brother]] [[264|sin]] [[1519|against]] [[1691|me]], [[2532|and]] [[863|I forgive]] [[846|him]]? [[2193|till]] [[2034|seven times]]?
{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

* '''[[Matthew 18:21 King James Version 2016|Matthew 18:21]]''' [[5119|Then]] [[4074|Peter]] [[4334|came]] [[846|to Him]] [[2036|and said]], “[[2962|Lord]], [[4212|how often]] [[3450|shall my]] [[80|brother]] [[264|sin]] [[1519|against]] [[1691|me]], [[2532|and]] [[863|I forgive]] [[846|him]]? [[2193|Until]] [[2034|seven times]]?”
{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] ([[Complutensian Polyglot]])

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Matthew 18:21 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] [[5119|Τότε]] [[4334|προσελθὼν]] [[846|αὐτῷ]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[4074|Πέτρος]] [[2036|εἶπε]], [[2962|Κύριε]], [[4212|ποσάκις]] [[264|ἁμαρτήσει]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[1691|ἐμὲ]] [[3588|ὁ]] [[80|ἀδελφός]] [[3450|μου]], [[2532|καὶ]] [[863|ἀφήσω]] [[846|αὐτῷ]]; [[2193|ἕως]] [[2034|ἑπτάκις]];

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] Thanne Petre cam to hym, and seide, Lord, how ofte schal my brother synne ayens me, and Y schal foryyue hym? ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] Then came Peter to him and sayde: master howe ofte shall I forgeve my brother yf he synne agaynst me seven tymes? ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Then came Peter vnto him, & sayde, LORDE, how oft shal I forgeue my brother, yt trespaceth agaynst me? Seue tymes? (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] Then came Peter to hym, & sayde: Lorde howe oft shall I forgeue my brother, yf he synne agaynst me: Tyll seuen tymes? ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] Then came Peter to hym, & sayde: master howe ofte shall I forgeue my brother, if he synne agaynst me, seuen tymes? ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Then came Peter to hym, and sayde: Lorde howe oft shall my brother sinne agaynst me, and I forgeue hym? tyll seuen tymes? ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Then came Peter to him, & said, Master, howe oft shall my brother sinne against me, and I shall forgiue him? vnto seuen times? ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] Then came Peter to him, and said, Lord, how oft shall my brother sinne against mee, and I forgiue him? till seuen times? ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] Then Peter advancing to him, said, Lord, if my brother injures me, how many injuries must I forgive him? must I forgive him seven? ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] Then came Peter to him, and said, Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? till seven times? (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] Then came Peter to him, and said, Lord, how oft shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? till seven times? ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] Then Peter came to Him and said, Lord, how often shall my brother offend against me, and I forgive him? to seven times? (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] Then came Peter to him, and said, Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Then Peter coming to him, said, Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? till seven times? (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] Then came Peter to him, and said, Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? till seven times? (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Then Peter approaching, said to him, Master, if my brother repeatedly trespass against me, how often must I forgive him? must I seven times? (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] Then Kipha came near to him, and said to him, My Lord, how many times, if my brother offend me, shall I forgive him; until seven times? ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Then came Peter and said to him, Lord, how many times shall my brother sin against me and I forgive him? Till seven times? (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Then coming to him the Peter, said: O lord, how often shall sin against me the brother of me, and I shall forgive him? till seven times? ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Then Peter came to him, and said: Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? Until seven times? (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Then came Peter, and said to him, Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? Until seven times? (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] Then came Peter to him, and said, Lord, how oft shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? till seven times? ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] Then came Peter, and said to him, Lord, how oft shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? until seven times? (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] Then Peter came to him and said, Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me and I forgive him? until seven times? (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] Then Peter having come near to him, said, `Sir, how often shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him -- till seven times?' ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] Then came Peter and said to him, Lord, how oft shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? until seven times? ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Then, coming near, Peter said [to him]––Lord! how many times, shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? Until, seven, times? (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Then Peter, coming to Him, said, Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? until seven times? (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Then Peter, coming near, said to Him, "Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? till seven times?" (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Then Peter came up, and said to Jesus: "Master, how often am I to forgive my Brother when he wrongs me? As many as seven times?" (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] At this point Peter came to Him with the question, "Master, how often shall my brother act wrongly towards me and I forgive him? seven times?" (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] Then came Peter and said to him: Lord, how often shall my brother sin against me and I forgive him? Till seven times? (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* حينئذ تقدم اليه بطرس وقال يا رب كم مرة يخطئ اليّ اخي وانا اغفر له. هل الى سبع مرات. <big> </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* ܗܝܕܝܢ ܩܪܒ ܠܘܬܗ ܟܐܦܐ ܘܐܡܪ ܡܪܝ ܟܡܐ ܙܒܢܝܢ ܐܢ ܢܤܟܠ ܒܝ ܐܚܝ ܐܫܒܘܩ ܠܗ ܥܕܡܐ ܠܫܒܥ ܙܒܢܝܢ ܀ <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Orduan harengana hurbilduric Pierrisec erran ceçan, Iauna, cembatetarano bekatu eguinen du ene contra ene anayec, eta barkaturen draucat? ala çazpitarano?

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] Тогава Петър се приближи и Му рече: Господи, до колко пъти, като ми съгреши брат ми, да му прощавам? до седем пъти ли? (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Матей 18:21) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 18:21 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Alors Pierre, s'approchant de lui, dit: Seigneur, combien de fois mon frère péchera-t-il contre moi, et lui pardonnerai-je? Sera-ce jusqu'à sept fois? (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Alors Pierre s'approchant, lui dit : Seigneur, jusques à combien de fois mon frère péchera-t-il contre moi, et je lui pardonnerai? sera-ce jusqu'à sept fois? (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Alors Pierre, s'étant approché, lui dit: Seigneur, combien de fois pardonnerai-je à mon frère, lorsqu'il péchera contre moi? (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] Da trat Petrus zu ihm und sprach: HERR, wie oft muß ich denn meinem Bruder, der an mir sündiget, vergeben? Ist's genug siebenmal? (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] Dann trat Petrus zu ihm und sprach: Herr, wie oft soll ich meinem Bruder, der wider mich sündigt, vergeben? (W. wie oft soll mein Bruder wider mich sündigen und ich ihm vergeben) bis siebenmal? (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Da trat Petrus zu ihm und sprach: HERR, wie oft muß ich denn meinem Bruder, der an mir sündigt, vergeben? Ist's genug siebenmal? (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Allora Pietro, accostatoglisi, disse: Signore, quante volte, peccando il mio fratello contro a me, gli perdonerò io? fino a sette volte? (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Allora Pietro, accostatosi, gli disse: Signore, quante volte, peccando il mio fratello contro di me, gli perdonerò io? fino a sette volte? (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* tunc accedens Petrus ad eum dixit Domine quotiens peccabit in me frater meus et dimittam ei usque septies [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[2015 AD|2015]] Atunci Petru a venit la el şi aspus: Doamne, cât de des să păcătuiascăfratele meu împotriva meaşi eu să îl iert? Până la şapte ori? ([[Fidela Bible|Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Тогда Петр приступил к Нему и сказал: Господи! сколько раз прощать брату моему, согрешающему против меня? до семи ли раз? [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Mateo 18:21 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Kisha Petro akamwendea Yesu, akamwuliza, "Je, ndugu yangu akinikosea, nimsamehe mara ngapi? Mara saba?"

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Då trädde Petrus fram och sade till honom: »Herre, huru många gånger skall jag förlåta min broder, om han försyndar sig mot mig? Är sju gånger nog?» (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Nang magkagayo'y lumapit si Pedro at sinabi sa kaniya, Panginoon, makailang magkakasala ang aking kapatid laban sa akin na siya'y aking patatawarin? hanggang sa makapito? (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Phi -e-rơ bèn đến gần Ðức Chúa Jêsus mà hỏi rằng: Thưa Chúa, nếu anh em tôi phạm tội cùng tôi, thì sẽ tha cho họ mấy lần? Có phải đến bảy lần chăng? (Ma-thi-ô 18:21 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Matthew 18:20

2018-11-24T11:13:44Z

Beza 1598: /* Romainian */

{{Verses in Matthew 18}}
* '''[[Matthew 18:20 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)|ΚΑΤΑ ΜΑΤΘΑΙΟΝ 18:20]]''' [[3757|οὗ]] [[1063|γάρ]] [[1526|εἰσι]] [[1417|δύο]] [[2228|ἢ]] [[5140|τρεῖς]] [[4863|συνηγμένοι]] [[1519|εἰς]] [[3588|τὸ]] [[1699|ἐμὸν]] [[3686|ὄνομα]], [[1563|ἐκεῖ]] [[1510|εἰμι]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[3319|μέσῳ]] [[846|αὐτῶν]].
{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Matthew 18:20''' [[1063|For]] [[3757|where]] [[1417|two]] [[2228|or]] [[1540|three]] [[1526|are]] [[4863|gathered together]] [[1519|in]] [[1699|my]] [[3686|name]], [[1563|there]] [[1510|am]] [[1722|I in]] [[3319|the midst]] [[846|of them]].
{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

* '''[[Matthew 18:20 King James Version 2016|Matthew 18:20]]''' Because, where two or three are gathered together in My name, I am there in the midst of them.”
{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] ([[Complutensian Polyglot]])

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Matthew 18:20 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] For where tweyne or thre ben gaderid in my name, there Y am in the myddil of hem. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] For where two or thre are gathered togedder in my name there am I in the myddes of them. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] For where two or thre are gathered together i my name, there am I in the myddest amonge them. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] For where two or thre are gathered to gether in my name, there am I in þe myddes of them ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] For where two or thre are gathered together in my name, there am I in the middes of them. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the myddes of them. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] For where two or three are gathered together in my Name, there am I in the mids of them. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] For where two or three are gathered together in my Name, there am I in the midst of them. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] for where two or three are assembled in my name, there am I in the midst of them. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] There are not two or three gathered together in my name, but I am in the midst of them. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] for where two or three are assembled together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] For where two or three are assembled in my name, there am I in the midst of them. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] For wherever two or three are assembled in my name, I am in the midst of them. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] For where two or three are assembled in my name, there am I in the midst of them. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] for where two or three are assembled together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Where for are two or three having come together in the my name, there i am in the midst of them. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] For where two or three are gathered together unto my name, there am I in the midst of them. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] for where there are two or three gathered together -- to my name, there am I in the midst of them.' ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] For, where there are two or three, gathered together into my name, there, am I, in their midst. (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] For where two or three are assembled in my name, there I am in the midst of them. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] for where two or three are gathered together in My name, there am I in the midst of them." (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] For where two or three have come together in my Name, I am present with them." (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] For where there are two or three assembled in my name, there am I in the midst of them." (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] For where there are two or three that have come together for my name, there am I in the midst of them. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* لانه حيثما اجتمع اثنان او ثلاثة باسمي فهناك اكون في وسطهم <big> </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* ܐܝܟܐ ܓܝܪ ܕܬܪܝܢ ܐܘ ܬܠܬܐ ܟܢܝܫܝܢ ܒܫܡܝ ܬܡܢ ܐܢܐ ܒܝܢܬܗܘܢ ܀ <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Ecen non baitirade biga edo hirur bilduric ene icenean, han naiz hayén artean.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] Защото, гдето двама или трима са събрани в Мое име, там съм и Аз посред тях. (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Матей 18:20) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 18:20 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* car là où deux ou trois sont assemblés en mon nom, je suis là au milieu d'eux. (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Car là où il y en a deux ou trois assemblés en mon Nom, je suis là au milieu d'eux. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Car où il y a deux ou trois personnes assemblées en mon nom, je suis là au milieu d'elles. (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] Denn wo zwei oder drei versammelt sind in meinem Namen, da bin ich mitten unter ihnen. (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] Denn wo zwei oder drei versammelt sind in meinem Namen, (Eig. zu meinem Namen hin) da bin ich in ihrer Mitte. (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Denn wo zwei oder drei versammelt sind in meinem Namen, da bin ich mitten unter ihnen. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Perciocchè, dovunque due, o tre, son raunati nel nome mio, quivi son io nel mezzo di loro. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Poiché dovunque due o tre son raunati nel nome mio, quivi son io in mezzo a loro. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* ubi enim sunt duo vel tres congregati in nomine meo ibi sum in medio eorum [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[2015 AD|2015]] Fiindcă unde sunt doi sau treiadunaţi în numele meu, sunt şieu acolo în mijlocul lor. ([[Fidela Bible|Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] ибо, где двое или трое собраны во имя Мое, там Я посреди них. [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Mateo 18:20 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Kwa maana popote pale wanapokusanyika wawili au watatu kwa jina langu, mimi nipo hapo kati yao."

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Ty var två eller tre är församlade i mitt namn, där är jag mitt ibland dem.» (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Sapagka't kung saan nagkakatipon ang dalawa o tatlo sa aking pangalan, ay naroroon ako sa gitna nila. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Vì nơi nào có hai ba người nhơn danh ta nhóm nhau lại, thì ta ở giữa họ. (Ma-thi-ô 18:20 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==

==External Links==

{{Donate}}

Matthew 18:19

2018-11-24T11:12:53Z

Beza 1598: /* Romainian */

{{Verses in Matthew 18}}
* '''[[Matthew 18:19 Greek NT: Beza's Textus Receptus (1598)|ΚΑΤΑ ΜΑΤΘΑΙΟΝ 18:19]]''' [[2825|πάλιν]] [[3004|λέγω]] [[5213|ὑμῖν]], [[3754|ὅτι]] [[1437|ἐὰν]] [[1417|δύο]] [[5216|ὑμῶν]] [[4856|συμφωνήσωσιν]] [[1909|ἐπὶ]] [[3588|τῆς]] [[1093|γῆς]] [[4012|περὶ]] [[3956|παντὸς]] [[4229|πράγματος]] [[3739|οὗ]] [[1437|ἐὰν]] [[154|αἰτήσωνται]], [[1096|γενήσεται]] [[846|αὐτοῖς]] [[3844|παρὰ]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[3962|πατρός]] [[3450|μου]] [[3588|τοῦ]] [[1722|ἐν]] [[3772|οὐρανοῖς]].
{{Textus Receptus 1598 Footer}}

* '''Matthew 18:19''' [[3825|Again]] [[3004|I say]] [[5213|unto you]], [[3754|That]] [[1437|if]] [[1417|two]] [[5216|of you]] [[4856|shall agree]] [[1909|on]] [[1093|earth]] [[4012|as touching]] [[3956|any]] [[4229|thing]] [[3739|that]] [[154|they shall ask]], [[1096|it shall be done]] [[846|for them]] [[3844|of]] [[3450|my]] [[3962|Father]] [[3588|which is]] [[1722|in]] [[3772|heaven]].
{{King James Version Pure Cambridge Edition Footer}}

* '''[[Matthew 18:19 King James Version 2016|Matthew 18:19]]''' “Again I say to you that if two of you agree on earth concerning anything that they ask, it will be done for them of My Father who is in heaven.
{{King James Version 2016 Edition}}

==Interlinear==

==Commentary==

==Greek==

====Textus Receptus====

* [[1514 AD|1514]] ([[Complutensian Polyglot]])

====[[Desiderius Erasmus]]====

* [[1516 AD|1516]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 1st [[Novum Instrumentum omne]])
* [[1519 AD|1519]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 2nd)
* [[1522 AD|1522]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 3rd [[Novum Testamentum omne]])
* [[1527 AD|1527]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 4th)
* [[1535 AD|1535]] ([[Desiderius Erasmus|Erasmus]] 5th)

====Colinæus====

* [[1534 AD|1534]] (Colinæus)

====Stephanus ([[Robert Estienne]])====

* [[1546 AD|1546]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 1st)
* [[1549 AD|1549]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 2nd)
* [[1550 AD|1550]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 3rd - [[Editio Regia]])
* [[1551 AD|1551]] ([[Robert Estienne]] (Stephanus) 4th)

====[[Theodore Beza]]====
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza 1st)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza Octavo 1st)
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (Beza Octavo 2nd)
* [[1580 AD|1580]] (Beza Octavo 3rd)
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Beza 2nd)
* [[1589 AD|1589]] (Beza 3rd)
* [[1590 AD|1590]] (Beza Octavo 4th)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza 4th)
''See Also [[Matthew 18:19 Beza 1598]] ([[Theodore Beza|Beza]])''
* [[1604 AD|1604]] (Beza Octavo 5th)

====Elzevir====

* [[1624 AD|1624]] (Elzevir)
* [[1633 AD|1633]] (Elzevir)
* [[1641 AD|1641]] (Elzevir)

====Scholz====

* [[1841 AD|1841]] ([[Johann Martin Augustin Scholz|Scholz]])

====Scrivener====

* [[1894 AD|1894]] (? ????? ???T???)

====Other Greek====

* [[1857 AD|1857]] (Tregelles' Greek New Testament)
* (Tischendorf 8th Ed.)
* [[1881 AD|1881]] (Westcott & Hort)
* (Greek orthodox Church)

==Anglo Saxon Translations==

* [[1000 AD|1000]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Manuscript 140, Corpus Christi College by Aelfric)

* [[1200 AD|1200]] (Anglo-Saxon Gospels Hatton Manuscript 38, Bodleian Library by unknown author)

==English Translations==

* [[1380 AD|1380]] ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1395 AD|1395]] Eftsoone Y seie to you, that if tweyne of you consenten on the erthe, of euery thing what euer thei axen, it schal be don to hem of my fadir that is in heuenes. ([[Wyclif's Bible]] by [[John Wycliffe]])
* [[1534 AD|1534]] Agayn I say vnto you that yf two of you shall agre in erth apon eny maner thynge what soever they shall desyre: it shalbe geven them of my father which is in heven. ([[Tyndale Bible]] by [[William Tyndale]])
* [[1535 AD|1535]] Agayne, I saye vnto you: Yf two of you shal agree vpon earth (for what thinge soeuer it be yt they wolde desyre) they shal haue it of my father which is in heaue. (Coverdale Bible)
* [[1539 AD|1539]] ([[Great Bible]] First Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1540 AD|1540]] Agayne I saye vnto you þt yf two of you agree in erthe vpon eny maner a thynge, whatsoeuer they desyre: they shall haue it of my father which is in heauen. ([[Great Bible]] Second Edition - [[Miles Coverdale]])
* [[1549 AD|1549]] Agayne I say vnto you, that if two of you shall agre in earth vpon any maner thyng whatsoeuer they shall desire: it shalbe geuen them of my father whyche is in heauen. ([[Matthew's Bible]] - [[John Rogers]])
* [[1557 AD|1557]] (Geneva [[1557 AD|1557]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1560 AD|1560]]
* [[1568 AD|1568]] Agayne, truely I say vnto you, that if two of you agree in earth, as touching any thyng that they shall aske, it shalbe done for them, of my father, which is in heauen. ([[Bishop's Bible]] First Edition)
* [[1572 AD|1572]] ([[Bishop's Bible]])
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Rheims [[1582 AD|1582]])
* [[1587 AD|1587]] Againe, verely I say vnto you, that if two of you shal agree in earth vpon any thing, whatsoeuer they shall desire, it shall be giuen them of my Father which is in heauen. ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1599 AD|1599]] ([[Geneva Bible]]) by [[William Whittingham]]
* [[1611 AD|1611]] Againe I say vnto you, that if two of you shall agree on earth as touching any thing that they shall aske, it shall bee done for them of my father which is in heauen. ([[King James Version]])
* [[1729 AD|1729]] I assure you, that if two of you shall live in agreement together, whatever they ask shall be granted to them by my heavenly father. ([[Mace New Testament]])
* [[1745 AD|1745]] Again I say unto you, that if two of you shall agree on earth as touching any thing that they shall ask, it shall be done for them of my Father who is in the heavens. (Mr. Whiston's Primitive New Testament)
* [[1762 AD|1762]] ([[King James Version]])
* [[1769 AD|1769]] Again I say unto you, That if two of you shall agree on earth as touching any thing that they shall ask, it shall be done for them of my Father which is in heaven. ([[King James Version]] - [[Benjamin Blayney]])
* [[1770 AD|1770]] And I tell you moreover, that if but two of you shall agree on earth concerning any thing which they would ask for, it shall be granted them by my Father who is in heaven: (Worsley Version by [[John Worsley]])
* [[1790 AD|1790]] Again I say to you, That if two of you shall agree on earth touching anything that they shall ask, it shall be done for them by my Father who is in heaven. (Wesley Version by [[John Wesley]])
* [[1795 AD|1795]] Again I say unto you, That if two of you are concurring upon earth, respecting any matter, which ye shall ask, it shall be done for them by my Father who is in heaven. (A Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by Thomas Haweis)
* [[1833 AD|1833]] Again I say to you, That if two of you shall agree on earth, concerning any thing that they shall ask, it shall be done for them by my Father who is in heaven. (Webster Version - by [[Noah Webster]])
* [[1835 AD|1835]] Again, I say to you, whatever two of you upon the earth shall agree to ask, shall be granted them by my Father, who is in heaven. (Living Oracles by Alexander Campbell)
* [[1849 AD|1849]] Again I say to you, that if two of you shall consent on earth concerning every thing that they shall ask, it shall be done for them by my Father who is in heaven. ([[Etheridge Translation]] by [[John Etheridge]])
* [[1850 AD|1850]] ([[King James Version]] by Committee)
* [[1851 AD|1851]] (Murdock Translation)
* [[1855 AD|1855]] [[Calvin Bible]] by the [[Calvin Translation Society]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Again, I tell you, that if two of you shall agree on the earth concerning any thing for which they shall ask, they shall have it from my Father in heaven; (The New Testament Translated from the Original Greek by [[Leicester Sawyer]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Again I say to you, that if two of you may agree upon the earth, about any matter, whatever they may ask, it shall be to them from the Father of me, of that in heavens. ([[The Emphatic Diaglott]] by [[Benjamin Wilson]])
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Again I say to you, that if two of you shall agree on earth, concerning any thing that they shall ask, it shall be done for them by my Father who is in heaven. (The New Testament of Our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ 1865 by American Bible Union)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Again, I say to you, that if two of you shall agree on earth concerning any thing that they shall ask, it will be done for them by my Father o who is in heaven. (Noyes Translation by George Noyes)
* [[1873 AD|1873]] Again I say unto you, That if two of you shall agree on earth as touching any thing that they shall ask, it shall be done for them of my Father which is in heaven. ([[King James Version]]) by [[Frederick Scrivener]])
* [[1885 AD|1885]] Again I say unto you, that if two of you shall agree on earth as touching anything that they shall ask, it shall be done for them of my Father which is in heaven. (Revised Version also called English Revised Version - Charles Ellicott editor)
* [[1890 AD|1890]] Again I say to you, that if two of you shall agree on the earth concerning any matter, whatsoever it may be that they shall ask, it shall come to them from my Father who is in [the] heavens. (Darby Version 1890 by [[John Darby]])
* [[1898 AD|1898]] `Again, I say to you, that, if two of you may agree on the earth concerning anything, whatever they may ask -- it shall be done to them from my Father who is in the heavens, ([[Young's Literal Translation]] by [[Robert Young]])
* [[1901 AD|1901]] Again I say unto you, that if two of you shall agree on earth as touching anything that they shall ask, it shall be done for them of my Father who is in heaven. ([[American Standard Version]] - [[Philip Schaff]])
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Again, [verily] I say unto you––If two from among you shall agree upon the earth concerning any matter, whatsoever they shall ask, it shall be brought to pass for them, from my Father who is in the heavens; (The Emphasised Bible Rotherham Version)
* [[1902 AD|1902]] Again I say unto you, that if two of you may agree upon the earth concerning everything which you may ask, it shall be done unto you by my Father, who is in the heavens. (Translation of the New Testament from the Original Greek by William Godbey)
* [[1904 AD|1904]] "Again, I say to you, that, if two of you shall agree on the earth concerning any matter which ye ask, it shall be done for them by My Father Who is in Heaven; (The New Testament: Revised and Translated by [[Adolphus Worrell]])
* [[1904 AD|1904]] Again, I tell you that, if but two of you on earth agree as to what they shall pray for, whatever it be, it will be granted them by my Father who is in Heaven. (Twentieth Century New Testament by Ernest Malan and Mary Higgs)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Syrus Scofield)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] I also solemnly tell you that if two of you here on earth agree together concerning anything whatever that they shall ask, the boon will come to them from my Father who is in Heaven. (Weymouth New Testament)
* [[1918 AD|1918]] Again, I say to you that if two of you on earth shall agree concerning any thing what ever they will ask, it shall be done for them by my Father who is in the heavens. (The New Testament Translated from the Sinaitic Manuscript by Henry Anderson)
* [[1923 AD|1923]] (Edgar Goodspeed)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] ([[New King James Version]]) Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson.
* [[1984 AD|1984]] ([[New International Version]])(NIV) Holy Bible, New International Version®, NIV® Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984, 2011 by Biblica, Inc.® 
* [[1995 AD|1995]] ([[New American Standard Bible]]) [[NASB]] (©1995)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] ([[American King James Version]])[[AKJV]]
* [[2000 ad|2000]] (King James 2000 Bible©)n
* [[2005 AD|2005]] ([[Today’s New International Version]])
* ([[BBE]])
* [[2009 ad|2009]] ([[Holman Christian Standard Bible]])(HCSB) Copyright © 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2009 by Holman Bible Publishers, Nashville Tennessee. All rights reserved.
* ([[21st Century King James Version]]) Copyright © 1994 by Deuel Enterprises, Inc.
* ([[Common English Bible]]) Copyright © 2011 by Common English Bible 
* ([[GOD’S WORD Translation]])(GW) Copyright © 1995 by God's Word to the Nations.
* ([[Contemporary English Version]])(CEV) Copyright © 1995 by American Bible Society
* ([[New Living Translation]])(NLT) Holy Bible. New Living Translation copyright© 1996, 2004, 2007, 2013 by Tyndale House Foundation.
* ([[Amplified Bible]]) Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1962, 1964, 1965, 1987 by The Lockman Foundation
* ([[The Message]]) (MSG) Copyright © 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002 by Eugene H. Peterson
* ([[New International Reader's Version]]) (NIRV) Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998, 2014 by Biblica, Inc.®.
* ([[Wycliffe New Testament]])

==Foreign Language Versions==

''See also [[Bible translations into Afrikaans]]''
====[[Afrikaans]]====
* [[1933 AD|1933]] (Ta Biblia Ta Logia - J. D. du Toit, E. E. van Rooyen, J. D. Kestell, H. C. M. Fourie, and BB Keet
* [[1953 AD|1953]]
* [[1982 AD|1982]] Paraphrase - Die Lewende Bybel, Christelike Uitgewersmaatskappy (CUM)
* [[1982 AD|1982]] South African Bible Society - E. P. Groenewald, A. H. van Zyl, P. A. Verhoef, J. L. Helberg, and W. Kempen
* [[1983 AD|1983]] © Bybelgenootskap van Suid Afrika
* [[2001 AD|2001]] The Nuwe Wêreld-vertaling van die Heilige Skrif is an Afrikaans translation of the 1984 English translation of the Bible by the Watchtower Society.
* [[2002 AD|2002]] Die Boodskap
* [[2002 AD|2002]] DieBybel@Kinders.co.za - Gert Prinsloo, Phil Botha, Willem Boshoff, Hennie Stander, Dirk Human, Stephan Joubert, and Jan van der Watt.
* [[2006 AD|2006]] The Nuwe Lewende Vertaling (literally "New Living Translation")
* [[2008 AD|2008]] Bybel vir Almal - South African Bible Society, Bart Oberholzer, Bernard Combrink, Hermie van Zyl, Francois Tolmie, Christo van der Merwe, Rocco Hough en Elmine Roux.
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Direct Translation, South African Bible Society
* [[2014 AD|2014]] Afrikaans Standard Version, CUM Books

====[[Akan]]====

====[[Albabian]]====
*

====[[Amuzgo de Guerrero]]====
* [[1973 AD|1973]] Amuzgo de Guerrero (AMU) Copyright © 1973, 1999 by La Liga Biblica
* [[1999 AD|1999]]

====[[Armenian]]====
*

====[[Arabic]]====
* [[1516 AD|1516]]
* [[1591 AD|1591]]
* [[1616 AD|1616]]
* [[1622 AD|1622]]
* [[1671 AD|1671]] Biblia Arabica. de propaganda fide. Arabic and Latin Bible printed in Rome by [[Abraham Ecchellensis]] and [[Louis Maracci]]
* واقول لكم ايضا ان اتفق اثنان منكم على الارض في اي شيء يطلبانه فانه يكون لهما من قبل ابي الذي في السموات. <big> </big>(Arabic Smith & Van Dyke)
* [[1988 AD|1988]] Arabic Life Application Bible (ALAB) Copyright © 1988 by Biblica
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Arabic Bible: Easy-to-Read Version (ERV-AR) Copyright © 2009 by World Bible Translation Center

====[[Aramaic]]/[[Syriac]]====
* ܬܘܒ ܐܡܪܢܐ ܠܟܘܢ ܕܐܢ ܬܪܝܢ ܡܢܟܘܢ ܢܫܬܘܘܢ ܒܐܪܥܐ ܥܠ ܟܠ ܨܒܘ ܕܢܫܐܠܘܢ ܢܗܘܐ ܠܗܘܢ ܡܢ ܠܘܬ ܐܒܝ ܕܒܫܡܝܐ ܀ <big> </big>(Aramaic Peshitta)

====[[Basque]]====
* [[1571]] Berriz diotsuet ecen baldin çuetaric biguec consenti badeçate lurraren gainean, esca ditecen gauça gucia eguinen çayela ene Aita ceruetan denaz.

====[[Bulgarian]]====
* [[1940 AD|1940]] Пак ви казвам, че ако двама от вас се съгласят на земята за каквото и да било нещо, което да поискат, ще им бъде [дадено] от Отца Ми, Който е на небесата. (1940 Bulgarian Bible)
* (Матей 18:19) (Bulgarian Bible)

====[[Cherokee]]====

* [[1860 AD|1860]] Cherokee New Testament (CHR)

====[[Chinese]]====
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Simplified))
* 1 (Chinese Union Version (Traditional))
* 18:19 ([[Chinese King James Version]])

====[[Croatian]]====

====[[Czech]]====

* [[1613 AD|1613]]

====[[Danish]]====

====[[Dutch]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]

====[[Esperanto]]====

====[[Finnish]]====
* [[1619 AD|1619]]
* [[1938 AD|1938]]

====[[French]]====
* Je vous dis encore que si deux d'entre vous sont d'accord sur la terre pour une chose quelconque, quelle que soit la chose qu'ils demanderont, elle sera faite pour eux par mon Père qui est dans les cieux; (French Darby)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Je vous dis aussi, que si deux d'entre vous s'accordent sur la terre, tout ce qu'ils demanderont leur sera donné par mon Père qui est aux cieux. (Martin 1744)
* [[1744 AD|1744]] Je vous dis encore, que si deux d'entre vous s'accordent sur la terre à demander quoi que ce soit, ils l'obtiendront de mon Père qui est aux cieux. (Ostervald 1744)
* [[1864 AD|1864]] (Augustin Crampon)
* [[1910 AD|1910]]
* [[2006 AD|2006]] ([[King James Française]])

====[[German]]====
* [[1545 AD|1545]] Weiter sage ich euch: Wo zwei unter euch eins werden auf Erden, warum es ist, das sie bitten wollen, das soll ihnen widerfahren von meinem Vater im Himmel. (Luther 1545)
* [[1871 AD|1871]] Wiederum sage ich euch: Wenn zwei von euch auf der Erde übereinkommen werden über irgend eine Sache, um welche sie auch bitten mögen, so wird sie ihnen werden von meinem Vater, der in den Himmeln ist. (Elberfelder 1871)
* [[1912 AD|1912]] Weiter sage ich euch: wo zwei unter euch eins werden, warum es ist, daß sie bitten wollen, das soll ihnen widerfahren von meinem Vater im Himmel. (Luther 1912)

====[[Greek]]====
* [[1904 AD|1904]] (Greek Orthodox (B. Antoniades))
* Modern Greek (Trinitarian Bible Society)

====[[Hungarian]]====

====[[Indonesian]]====

====[[Italian]]====
* [[1649 AD|1649]] Oltre a ciò, io vi dico, che, se due di voi consentono sopra la terra, intorno a qualunque cosa chiederanno, quella sarà lor fatta dal Padre mio, che è ne’ cieli. (Giovanni Diodati Bible 1649)
* [[1927 AD|1927]] Ed anche in verità vi dico: Se due di voi sulla terra s’accordano a domandare una cosa qualsiasi, quella sarà loro concessa dal Padre mio che è nei cieli. (Riveduta Bible 1927)

====[[Japanese]]====
* [[1928 AD|1928]] ([[Naoji Nagai]])

====[[Kabyle]]====

====Khmer====

* [[1928 AD|1928]]

====[[Latin]]====

* iterum dico vobis quia si duo ex vobis consenserint super terram de omni re quacumque petierint fiet illis a Patre meo qui in caelis est [[Latin Vulgate]]
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus 1527)
* [[1527 AD|1527]] (Erasmus Vulgate 1527)
* [[1565 AD|1565]] (Beza)
* [[1598 AD|1598]] (Beza)

====[[Latvian]]====

====[[Maori]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1837 AD|1837]]
* [[1858 AD|1858]]
* [[1868 AD|1868]] (Formal translation based on the Greek 'Received Text': [[Trinitarian Bible Society]])
* [[1833 AD|1833]]
* [[1952 AD|1952]]

====[[Norwegian]]====

* [[1930 AD|1930]]

====[[Pidgin]]====
* [[1996 AD|1996]] (Pidgin King Jems)

====[[Portugese]]====

====[[Potawatomi]]====
* [[1833 AD|1833]] (Potawatomi Matthew and Acts)

====[[Romainian]]====

* [[1551 AD|1551]] (Slavic-Romanian Gospel)
* [[1561 AD|1561]] ([[Coresi]]'s Gospel)
* [[1570 AD|1570]] (The Braşov Psalm Book) Psalms Only
* [[1582 AD|1582]] (Palia from Orăştie)
* [[1648 AD|1648]] (The New Testament of Alba Iulia)
* [[1688 AD|1688]] ([[Biblia de la Bucureşti]] - Bucharest Bible)
* [[1911 AD|1911]] (Nitzulescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1921 AD|1921]] (Cornilescu)
* [[1924 AD|1924]] (Cornilescu - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[1989 AD|1989]] (Gute Botschaft Verlag)
* [[2010 AD|2010]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna - [[Textus Receptus]] Based)
* [[2013 AD|2013]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba română - based upon the [[Textus Receptus]] / [[King James Version]])
* [[2014 AD|2014]] (Cornilescu 90th anniversary definitive edition - [[British and Foreign Bible Society]])
* [[2015 AD|2015]] Din nou vă spun că: Dacădoi dintre voi se învoiesc pe pământîn legătură cu orice lucrusă îl ceară, acesta le va fi făcut deTatăl meu care este în cer. ([[Fidela Bible|Biblia Traducerea Fidela în limba româna]])

====[[Russian]]====
* [[1876 AD|1876]] Истинно также говорю вам, что если двое из вас согласятся на земле просить о всяком деле, то, чего бы ни попросили, будет им от Отца Моего Небесного, [[Russian Synodal Version]]
* Phonetically:

====Sanskrit====
* [[1851 AD|1851]]

====Shur====

====[[Spanish]]====
''See Also [[Bible translations (Spanish)]]''
* [[1543 AD|1543]] ([[Francisco de Enzinas]] New Testament)
* [[1556 AD|1556]] (Juan Perez de Pineda New Testament and book of Psalms)
* [[1569 AD|1569]] (Sagradas Escrituras)
* [[1814 AD|1814]] Valera Revision
* [[1817 AD|1817]] Valera Revision
* [[1831 AD|1831]] Valera Revision
* [[1858 AD|1858]] Reina Valera
* [[1862 AD|1862]] Valera Revision
* [[1865 AD|1865]] Valera Revision (American Bible Society Revisión)
* [[1869 AD|1869]] Valera Revision
* [[1909 AD|1909]] (Reina-Valera) Antigua Spanish Bible
* [[1960 AD|1960]] Versión Reina-Valera (Eugene Nida )
* [[1987 AD|1987]] Translation from English. Publisher: Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society.
* [[1994 AD|1994]] Nuevo Testamento versión Recobro
* [[1997 AD|1997]] (La Biblia de las Américas) (©1997)
* [[1999 AD|1999]] Nueva Versión Internacional (NVI)
* [[2002 AD|2002]] (1602 Purificada)
* [[2009 AD|2009]] Santa Biblia: Reina-Valera
* [[Mateo 1:1 (RVG)|1]] ([[Reina Valera Gómez]])

====[[Swahili]]====
* Tena nawaambieni, wawili miongoni mwenu wakikubaliana hapa duniani kuhusu jambo lolote la kuomba, Baba yangu wa mbinguni atawafanyia jambo hilo.

====[[Swedish]]====
* [[1917 AD|1917]] Ytterligare säger jag eder, att om två av eder här på jorden komma överens att bedja om något, vad det vara må, så skall det beskäras dem av min Fader, som är i himmelen. (Swedish - Svenska 1917)

====[[Tagalog]]====
* [[1905 AD|1905]] Muling sinasabi ko sa inyo, na kung pagkasunduan ng dalawa sa inyo sa lupa ang nauukol sa anomang bagay na kanilang hihingin, ay gagawin sa kanila ng aking Ama na nasa langit. (Ang Dating Biblia 1905)

====Thai====
(Thai KJV)

====[[Turkish]]====

====[[Ukrainian]]====

====[[Urdu]]====
* [[1878 AD|1878]] (Hindustani Roman Script)
* [[1938 AD|1938]] (Urdu Revised Version. [[British and Foreign Bible Society]], 1938)
* [[2016 AD|2016]] (Urdu Bible)

====[[Vietnamese]]====
* [[1934 AD|1934]] Quả thật, ta lại nói cùng các ngươi, nếu hai người trong các ngươi thuận nhau ở dưới đất mà cầu xin không cứ việc chi, thì Cha ta ở trên trời sẽ cho họ. (Ma-thi-ô 18:19 Vietnamese Bible) (VIET)

====[[Welsh]]====
* [[1567 AD|1567]] (William Salesbury, printed in 1567 by Humphrey Toy)
* [[1588 AD|1588]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1620 AD|1620]] ([[William Morgan]])
* [[1824 AD|1824]]
* [[1988 AD|1988]] ([[New Welsh Bible]])
* [[2004 AD|2004]]
* [[2011 AD|2011]] (beibl.net 2011 by [[Arfon Jones]])

==See Also==

==External Links==

{{Donate}}